MY18 GLE SUV Operators Manual
MY18-GLE550e-Operators-Manual 2018 Mercedes-Benz GLE-Hybrid Owners Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
MY18_GLE_Coupe_Operators_Manual 2018 Mercedes-Benz GLE-Coupe Owners Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
User Manual: Pdf 2018 Mercedes-Benz GLE-SUV Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 398
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multimedia system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS
Android™
GLE
É1665843808<ËÍ
1665843808
Order no. P166 0444 13 Part no. 166 584 38 08 Edition A 2018
GLE Operator's Manual
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:
RDTS™
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
(Y
page)
YY
Dis‐
play
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the next
page.
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia display.
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Operator's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstra e 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an instruction
X
that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in succession
X
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
As at 08.03.2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
RDigital Operator's Manual
RPrinted Operator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multimedia system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information
regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations,
interesting background information and a
wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
can view all the information on your vehicle
and multimedia system via mobile Internet
or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tablets.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1665843808 É1665843808<ËÍ
2
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26
Introduction ........................................... 26
Operation ............................................... 26
Introduction .........................................
Protecting the environment ...................
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............
Operator's Manual .................................
Service and vehicle operation ................
Operating safety ....................................
QR codes for the rescue card ................
Data stored in the vehicle ......................
Information on copyright .......................
27
27
27
28
28
30
32
32
35
At a glance ...........................................
Cockpit ..................................................
Instrument cluster .................................
Multifunction steering wheel .................
Center console ......................................
Overhead control panel .........................
Door control panel .................................
36
36
37
38
39
42
43
Safety ...................................................
Panic alarm ............................................
Occupant safety ....................................
Children in the vehicle ...........................
Pets in the vehicle .................................
Driving safety systems ...........................
Protection against theft .........................
44
44
44
59
65
66
75
Opening and closing ...........................
SmartKey ...............................................
Doors .....................................................
Cargo compartment ...............................
Side windows .........................................
Sliding sunroof .......................................
77
77
83
84
88
92
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97
Correct driver's seat position ................ 97
Seats ..................................................... 97
Steering wheel ..................................... 103
Mirrors ................................................. 105
Memory function ................................. 108
Lights and windshield wipers ..........
Exterior lighting ...................................
Interior lighting ....................................
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED
headlamps) ..........................................
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) ...................................
Windshield wipers ................................
110
110
114
Climate control .................................
Overview of climate control systems ...
Operating the climate control systems ....................................................
Setting the air vents ............................
122
122
Driving and parking ..........................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .....
Driving .................................................
DYNAMIC SELECT controller ...............
Automatic transmission .......................
Refueling .............................................
Parking ................................................
Driving tips ..........................................
Driving systems ...................................
Towing a trailer ....................................
Bicycle rack .........................................
134
134
134
142
143
150
156
159
169
219
225
On-board computer and displays ....
Important safety notes ........................
Displays and operation ........................
Menus and submenus .........................
Display messages ...............................
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ...............................
228
228
228
231
243
Multimedia system ...........................
General notes ......................................
Important safety notes ........................
Function restrictions ............................
Operating system ................................
287
287
287
287
288
115
115
117
127
132
274
Stowage and features ...................... 295
Stowage areas ..................................... 295
Contents
Features .............................................. 304
Maintenance and care ......................
Engine compartment ...........................
ASSYST PLUS ......................................
Care .....................................................
321
321
325
326
Breakdown assistance .....................
Where will I find...? ..............................
Flat tire ................................................
Battery (vehicle) ..................................
Jump-starting .......................................
Towing and tow-starting ......................
Fuses ...................................................
334
334
335
340
342
345
348
Wheels and tires ...............................
Important safety notes ........................
Operation ............................................
Winter operation ..................................
Tire pressure .......................................
Loading the vehicle ..............................
All about wheels and tires ...................
Changing a wheel ................................
Wheel and tire combinations ...............
Emergency spare wheel .......................
351
351
351
353
354
361
364
371
376
376
Technical data ...................................
Information regarding technical data ...
Vehicle electronics ..............................
Identification plates .............................
Service products and filling capacities ......................................................
Vehicle data .........................................
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..........
Trailer tow hitch ...................................
381
381
381
382
383
390
392
394
3
4
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) ..................................................
12 V socket
see Sockets
115 V socket ......................................
360° camera
Cleaning .........................................
Display in the multimedia system ..
Function/notes .............................
213
308
330
200
198
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 244
Function/notes ................................ 66
Important safety notes .................... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 277
Accident
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 293
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 127
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 264
Function/information .................... 208
Trailer towing ................................. 210
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 237
Display message ............................ 249
Function/notes ................................ 67
Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function
Activating or deactivating .............. 237
Display message ............................ 250
Function/notes ................................ 72
Important safety notes .................... 73
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Active Curve System
Display message ............................ 261
Function/notes ............................. 184
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 263
Function/information .................... 210
Trailer towing ................................. 213
Active light function ......................... 112
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
Adaptive Damping System
see ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 256
Function/notes ............................. 113
Switching on/off ........................... 114
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 388
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 288
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Function/notes ............................. 183
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 56
Display message ............................ 253
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 50
Important safety notes .................... 49
Introduction ..................................... 49
Knee bag .......................................... 50
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 51
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 45
Side impact air bag .......................... 51
Window curtain air bag .................... 51
Air filter (display message) .............. 259
AIR FLOW ........................................... 128
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 132
Important safety notes .................. 132
Rear ............................................... 133
Setting ........................................... 132
Setting the center air vents ........... 132
Setting the side air vents ............... 132
Index
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRMATIC package
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 183
Function/notes ............................. 183
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 75
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 186
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 240
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Approach/departure angle .............. 168
Ashtray ............................................... 307
Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 236
Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 236
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 325
Hiding a service message .............. 325
Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 325
Service message ............................ 325
Special service requirements ......... 326
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 75
Function ........................................... 75
Switching off the alarm .................... 75
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 237
Display message ............................ 260
Function/notes ............................. 202
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 234
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ...............
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) ....................................
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) ..........................
Automatic headlamp mode ..............
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position .............
Changing gear ...............................
DIRECT SELECT lever .....................
Display message ............................
Drive program ................................
Drive program display ....................
Driving tips ....................................
DYNAMIC SELECT controller .........
Emergency running mode ..............
Engaging drive position ..................
Engaging neutral ............................
Engaging park position automatically ...............................................
Engaging reverse gear ...................
Engaging the park position ............
Important safety notes ..................
Kickdown .......................................
Manual shifting ..............................
Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .....
Overview ........................................
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Pulling away ...................................
Starting the engine ........................
Steering wheel paddle shifters ......
Trailer towing .................................
Transmission position display ........
Transmission positions ..................
Automatic transmission emergency mode .......................................
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ...............................
Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ......................................................
255
326
140
139
110
146
146
143
270
146
145
146
142
150
145
144
144
144
144
143
146
147
240
143
150
138
137
147
146
145
145
150
294
394
5
6
Index
B
Back button ....................................... 288
Bag hook ............................................ 300
Ball coupling
Installing ........................................ 221
Removing ....................................... 224
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 80
Important safety notes .................... 80
Replacing ......................................... 80
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 342
Display message ............................ 257
Important safety notes .................. 340
Jump starting ................................. 342
Overview ........................................ 340
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt warning ......................................... 48
Bicycle rack ....................................... 225
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 237
Display message ............................ 264
Notes/function .............................. 204
Trailer towing ................................. 206
see Active Blind Spot Assist
BlueTEC
Adding DEF .................................... 153
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 386
Bluetooth®
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 291
Searching for a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 292
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Telephony ...................................... 291
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 249
Notes ............................................. 388
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 255
Brake linings
Display message ............................ 249
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 66
BAS .................................................. 67
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 388
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 69
Display message ............................ 244
High-performance brake system .... 163
Hill start assist ............................... 139
Important safety notes .................. 161
Maintenance .................................. 162
Parking brake ................................ 157
Riding tips ...................................... 161
Warning lamp ................................. 276
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation
Function/notes ................................ 69
Breakdown
Where will I find...? ........................ 334
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 37
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 28
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
360° camera ................................. 330
Car wash ........................................ 326
Carpets .......................................... 333
Display ........................................... 331
Exhaust pipe .................................. 330
Exterior lights ................................ 329
Gear or selector lever .................... 332
Interior ........................................... 331
Matte finish ................................... 328
Notes ............................................. 326
Index
Paint .............................................. 328
Plastic trim .................................... 331
Power washer ................................ 327
Rear view camera .......................... 330
Roof lining ...................................... 333
Seat belt ........................................ 332
Seat cover ..................................... 332
Sensors ......................................... 330
Side running board ........................ 330
Steering wheel ............................... 332
Trim pieces .................................... 332
Washing by hand ........................... 327
Wheels ........................................... 329
Windows ........................................ 329
Wiper blades .................................. 329
Wooden trim .................................. 332
Cargo compartment cover
Notes/how to use ......................... 300
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes .................. 298
Cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes .................. 302
Opening/closing ............................ 303
Stowage well (under) ..................... 302
Cargo net
Attaching ....................................... 301
Important safety information ......... 301
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 299
CD
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 234
Center console
Lower section .................................. 40
Upper section .................................. 39
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 239
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77
Child
Restraint system .............................. 61
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 64
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 62
On the front-passenger seat ............ 63
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64
Top Tether ....................................... 62
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 64
Rear doors ....................................... 65
Children
Special seat belt retractor ............... 60
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 59
Cigarette lighter ................................ 307
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 330
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 331
Climate control
Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 125
Controlling automatically ............... 128
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127
Defrosting the windows ................. 130
Defrosting the windshield .............. 129
Dual-zone automatic climate control ................................................. 123
General notes ................................ 122
Indicator lamp ................................ 128
Ionization ....................................... 131
Maximum cooling .......................... 130
Notes on using the automatic climate control .................................. 127
Overview of systems ...................... 122
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 131
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 128
Rear control panel ......................... 125
Refrigerant ..................................... 389
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 390
Setting the air distribution ............. 129
Setting the air vents ...................... 132
Setting the airflow ......................... 129
Setting the climate mode (AIR
FLOW) ............................................ 128
Setting the temperature ................ 128
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 131
Switching on/off ........................... 127
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 131
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 130
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 129
7
8
Index
Coat hooks ......................................... 302
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 36
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 379
see Emergency spare wheel
COMAND
Driving dynamics display ............... 218
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 331
Combination switch .......................... 111
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 231
Controller ........................................... 288
Convenience closing feature .............. 90
Convenience opening feature ............ 89
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 324
Display message ............................ 256
Filling capacity ............................... 389
Important safety notes .................. 388
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240
Temperature gauge ........................ 229
Warning lamp ................................. 283
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 35
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 255
Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 115
Crosswind Assist ................................. 72
Crosswind driving assistance ............ 72
Cruise control
Activating ....................................... 170
Activation conditions ..................... 170
Cruise control lever ....................... 170
Deactivating ................................... 171
Display message ............................ 266
Driving system ............................... 169
Function/notes ............................. 169
Important safety notes .................. 169
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 170
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 305
Important safety notes .................. 304
Rear compartment ......................... 305
Temperature controlled ................. 305
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 31
Customer Relations Department ....... 31
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 234
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 255
Function/notes ............................. 110
Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 238
Declarations of conformity ................. 30
DEF
Adding ........................................... 153
Display message ............................ 259
Filling capacity ............................... 387
Important safety notes .................. 386
Diagnostics connection ...................... 31
Differential lock (display message) ................................................... 262
Digital Operator's Manual
Help ................................................. 26
Introduction ..................................... 26
Digital speedometer ......................... 232
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 143
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 325
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 243
Driving systems ............................. 260
Engine ............................................ 256
General notes ................................ 243
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 243
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 273
Lights ............................................. 255
Index
Safety systems .............................. 244
SmartKey ....................................... 273
Tires ............................................... 268
Vehicle ........................................... 270
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 173
Activation conditions ..................... 173
Cruise control lever ....................... 173
Display Message ............................ 265
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 176
Driving tips .................................... 177
Function/notes ............................. 171
Important safety notes .................. 171
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 175
Stopping ........................................ 174
Switching off .................................. 175
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 285
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 68
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 239
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 77
Control panel ................................... 43
Display message ............................ 272
Emergency locking ........................... 84
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Important safety notes .................... 83
Opening (from inside) ...................... 83
Overview .......................................... 83
Power closing .................................. 84
Downhill speed regulation
see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Drinking and driving ......................... 160
Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 146
Off-Road program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package) ............................................... 214
Off-road programs (vehicles with
Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 215
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241
Drive programs
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 145
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving
Important safety notes .................. 134
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 326
Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 208
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle ............ 168
Driving lamps
see Daytime running lamps
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 67
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 69
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66
Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function ................................. 72
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67
Distance warning function ............... 68
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 72
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 70
Important safety information ........... 66
Overview .......................................... 66
STEER CONTROL ............................. 75
Driving system
AIRMATIC package ........................ 183
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 171
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot ................................. 177
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
Parking Pilot .................................. 190
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 198
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 208
Active Curve System ...................... 184
9
10
Index
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............
ADS ...............................................
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ...........................................
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................
Blind Spot Assist ............................
Cruise control ................................
Display message ............................
Driving Assistance Plus package ...
HOLD function ...............................
Lane Keeping Assist ......................
Level control (vehicle with the OffRoad Engineering package) ...........
Rear view camera ..........................
Traffic Sign Assist ..........................
Driving tips
Automatic transmission .................
Brakes ...........................................
Break-in period ..............................
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC .............
Downhill gradient ...........................
Drinking and driving .......................
Driving in winter .............................
Driving on flooded roads ................
Driving on sand ..............................
Driving on wet roads ......................
Driving over obstacles ...................
Exhaust check ...............................
Fuel ................................................
General ..........................................
Hydroplaning .................................
Icy road surfaces ...........................
Limited braking efficiency on salted roads .......................................
Off-road driving ..............................
Off-road fording .............................
Snow chains ..................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .....
Tire ruts .........................................
Towing a trailer ..............................
Traveling uphill ...............................
Wet road surface ...........................
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Display message ............................
Function/notes .............................
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) .....
210
183
186
202
204
169
260
208
182
206
179
194
203
146
161
134
177
161
160
164
163
167
163
168
160
159
159
163
164
162
165
164
353
134
167
220
168
162
262
213
234
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Automatic transmission ................. 142
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 239
Function/notes ............................. 104
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 105
Function/notes ............................. 104
Switching on/off ........................... 239
EASY-PACK cargo compartment
management system ........................ 302
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message ............................ 246
Function/notes ................................ 72
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 160
On-board computer ....................... 232
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 140
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 139
Deactivating/activating ................. 140
General information ....................... 139
Important safety notes .................. 139
Introduction ................................... 139
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 84
Vehicle ............................................. 84
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 377
Important safety notes .................. 376
Removing ....................................... 377
Storage location ............................ 377
Stowing .......................................... 377
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 56
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate ............................................ 88
Index
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 28
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 283
Display message ............................ 256
ECO start/stop function ................ 139
Engine number ............................... 383
Irregular running ............................ 141
Jump-starting ................................. 342
Starting (important safety notes) ... 136
Starting problems .......................... 141
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 137
Starting via smartphone ................ 137
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 137
Switching off .................................. 157
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 348
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 141
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 323
Additives ........................................ 388
Checking the oil level ..................... 322
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 323
Display message ............................ 258
Filling capacity ............................... 387
Notes about oil grades ................... 387
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 322
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240
Engine switch-off
see ECO start/stop function
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 241
Characteristics ................................. 70
Deactivating/activating ................... 71
Display message ............................ 244
Function/notes ................................ 70
General notes .................................. 70
Important safety information ........... 70
Warning lamp ................................. 279
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 70
Exhaust check ................................... 160
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 330
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 105
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 240
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 106
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107
Setting ........................................... 106
Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 108
Storing the parking position .......... 107
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 297
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
MOExtended tires ..........................
Preparing the vehicle .....................
TIREFIT kit ......................................
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ...........................................
Fog lamps (extended range) .............
Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back .......................................
Fording
Off-road .........................................
On flooded roads ...........................
Frequencies
Mobile phone .................................
Two-way radio ................................
Fuel
Additives ........................................
Consumption statistics ..................
Displaying the current consumption ................................................
Displaying the range ......................
289
336
335
337
319
113
298
164
163
381
381
385
231
232
232
11
12
Index
Driving tips .................................... 159
Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 386
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 384
Important safety notes .................. 384
Low outside temperatures ............. 385
Problem (malfunction) ................... 153
Quality (diesel) ............................... 385
Refueling ........................................ 150
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 384
Fuel filler flap
Opening ......................................... 152
Fuel filter (display message) ............ 259
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 384
Problem (malfunction) ................... 153
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 348
Before changing ............................. 348
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 349
Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 349
Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 350
Important safety notes .................. 348
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 319
General notes ................................ 316
Important safety notes .................. 317
Opening/closing the garage door .. 319
Problems when programming ........ 318
Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 317
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 318
Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 240
Genuine parts ...................................... 27
Glove box ........................................... 296
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) .................................................... 370
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 112
Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 99
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 100
Luxury ............................................ 100
Headlamps
Fogging up ..................................... 114
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 111
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113
Display message ............................ 255
Replacing bulbs ............................. 116
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Highway mode ................................... 113
Hill start assist .................................. 139
HOLD function
Deactivating ................................... 182
Display message ............................ 263
Function/notes ............................. 182
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Hood
Closing ........................................... 322
Display message ............................ 272
Important safety notes .................. 321
Opening ......................................... 321
Horn ...................................................... 36
Hydroplaning ..................................... 163
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 75
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Index
Indicators
see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator .... 322
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 37
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 37
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 228
Intelligent Light System
Activating/deactivating ................. 238
Display message ............................ 255
Overview ........................................ 112
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 114
Emergency lighting ........................ 115
General notes ................................ 114
Manual control ............................... 114
Overview ........................................ 114
Reading lamp ................................. 114
iPod®
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 335
Using ............................................. 373
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 342
K
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 135
SmartKey ....................................... 135
KEYLESS-GO
Activating ......................................... 78
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Deactivation ..................................... 78
Display message ............................ 273
Locking ............................................ 78
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 136
Start function ................................... 79
Start/Stop button .......................... 135
Starting the engine ........................ 137
Unlocking ......................................... 78
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 146
Manual gearshifting ....................... 149
Knee bag .............................................. 50
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 237
Display message ............................ 263
Function/information .................... 206
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 241
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 62
Level control
AIRMATIC ...................................... 185
Level control (display message) ...... 260
Level control (vehicle with the OffRoad Engineering package)
Basic settings ................................ 179
Function/notes ............................. 179
Important safety notes .................. 179
License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 255
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 255
Light sensor (display message) ....... 255
Light switch
Operation ....................................... 110
Lights
Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ 238
Active light function ....................... 112
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 110
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 113
Hazard warning lamps ................... 112
High beam flasher .......................... 111
High-beam headlamps ................... 111
Highway mode ............................... 113
Light switch ................................... 110
Low-beam headlamps .................... 111
Off-road lights ................................ 113
Parking lamps ................................ 111
Rear fog lamp ................................ 111
Standing lamps .............................. 111
13
14
Index
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 238
Turn signals ................................... 111
see Interior lighting
see Replacing the bulbs
Loading guidelines ............................ 295
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 84
Emergency locking ........................... 84
From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 83
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 239
LOW RANGE
Display message ............................ 262
Off-road gear ................................. 216
LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 216
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 255
Replacing bulbs ............................. 116
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Lumbar support
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 101
Luxury head restraints ..................... 100
M
M+S tires ............................................
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
mbrace
Call priority ....................................
Display message ............................
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) .....................................
Downloading routes .......................
Emergency call ..............................
General notes ................................
Geo fencing ...................................
Info call button ..............................
Locating a stolen vehicle ...............
353
328
313
249
313
316
310
310
316
312
315
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 315
Remote vehicle locking .................. 314
Roadside assistance button ........... 311
Search & Send ............................... 313
Self-test ......................................... 310
Speed alert .................................... 316
System .......................................... 310
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 316
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 314
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 79
General notes .................................. 79
Inserting .......................................... 79
Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Removing ......................................... 79
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the
center console ............................... 296
see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) ......................... 234
Memory function ............................... 108
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera .................................. 198
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 208
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 210
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 202
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 171
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot ................................. 177
General notes ................................ 169
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 206
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
Parking Pilot .................................. 190
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
Rear view camera .......................... 194
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 203
Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 243
Mirror
Vanity mirror (sun visor) ................ 305
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 330
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
Index
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 291
Connecting (device manager) ........ 292
Frequencies ................................... 381
Installation ..................................... 381
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235
Transmission output (maximum) .... 381
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 79
MOExtended tires .............................. 336
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 375
Mounting a new wheel ................... 374
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 372
Raising the vehicle ......................... 373
Removing a wheel .......................... 374
Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 372
MP3
Operation ....................................... 234
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 230
Permanent display ......................... 238
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 229
Overview .......................................... 38
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ...................... 288
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
N
Navigation
Entering a destination ....................
Menu (on-board computer) ............
see also Digital Operator's Manual ..................................................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......................................................
289
232
287
134
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 52
Faults ............................................... 55
Operation ......................................... 52
System self-test ............................... 54
Occupant safety
Air bags ........................................... 49
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59
Belt warning ..................................... 48
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Important safety notes .................... 44
Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 44
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 51
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 45
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 58
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45
Seat belt .......................................... 45
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 52
Faults ............................................... 55
Operation ......................................... 52
System self-test ............................... 54
Odometer ........................................... 231
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle ............ 393
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 167
Checklist before driving off-road .... 166
Fording depth ................................ 392
General information ....................... 165
Important safety notes .................. 165
Maximum gradient climbing ability .................................................. 393
Traveling uphill ............................... 168
Off-road lights .................................... 113
Off-Road program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package)
Function/notes ............................. 214
15
16
Index
Off-road programs (vehicles with
Off-Road Engineering package)
Function/notes ............................. 215
Off-road drive program .................. 215
Offroad Plus drive program ............ 216
Off-road programs (vehicles with
the Off-Road Engineering package)
Displays in the COMAND display ... 218
Off-road system
4MATIC .......................................... 213
DSR ............................................... 213
LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 216
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 70
Off-road ABS .................................... 67
Off-road ESP® .................................. 72
Off-Road program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package) ............................................... 214
Off-road programs (vehicles with
Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 215
Oil
see Engine oil
On and Offroad menu (on-board
computer) .......................................... 240
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 240
Assistance menu ........................... 236
Audio menu ................................... 234
Convenience submenu .................. 239
Display messages .......................... 243
Displaying a service message ........ 325
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 176
Factory settings submenu ............. 240
Important safety notes .................. 228
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238
Lighting submenu .......................... 238
Menu overview .............................. 231
Message memory .......................... 243
Navigation menu ............................ 232
On and Offroad menu .................... 240
Operation ....................................... 229
RACETIMER ................................... 241
Service menu ................................. 237
Settings menu ............................... 238
Standard display ............................ 231
Telephone menu ............................ 235
Trip menu ...................................... 231
Vehicle submenu ........................... 239
Video DVD operation ..................... 234
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Important safety notes .................... 30
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26
Operator's Manual
Overview .......................................... 28
Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
Outside temperature display ........... 228
Overhead control panel ...................... 42
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 65
P
Paddle shifters
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Paint code number ............................ 382
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 328
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
Important safety notes .................... 92
Opening/closing the roller sunblind ................................................. 95
Operating ......................................... 94
Operating the roller sunblinds for
the sliding sunroof ........................... 94
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Reversing feature ............................. 93
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 156
Parking brake ................................ 157
Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 107
Rear view camera .......................... 194
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Parking Pilot .................................. 190
see 360° camera
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 189
Driving system ............................... 187
Index
Function/notes ............................. 187
Important safety notes .................. 187
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 190
Sensor range ................................. 188
Towing a trailer .............................. 187
Warning display ............................. 189
Parking assistance
see Driving system
Parking brake
Applying automatically ................... 158
Applying or releasing manually ...... 158
Display message ............................ 246
Electric parking brake .................... 157
Emergency braking ........................ 159
General notes ................................ 157
Releasing automatically ................. 158
Warning lamp ................................. 282
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Parking Pilot
Canceling ....................................... 194
Detecting parking spaces .............. 191
Display Message ............................ 264
Exiting a parking space .................. 193
Function/notes ............................. 190
Important safety notes .................. 190
Parking .......................................... 192
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 253
Indicator lamps ................................ 45
Problem (malfunction) ................... 253
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 331
Power locks ......................................... 84
Power washers .................................. 327
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 250
Operation ......................................... 58
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Display message ............................ 250
Operation ......................................... 59
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Immobilizer ...................................... 75
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 27
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 138
General notes ................................ 138
Hill start assist ............................... 139
Trailer ............................................ 138
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 32
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
R
RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 241
Radiator cover ................................... 322
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 234
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Radio-controlled devices (installing) ..................................................... 320
Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Reading lamp ..................................... 114
Rear bench seat
Folding forwards/back .................. 299
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 133
Setting the temperature ................ 128
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 255
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Rear Seat Entertainment System
AUX jacks ...................................... 294
17
18
Index
AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 294
Rear seats
Adjusting ....................................... 100
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 330
Display in the multimedia system .. 195
Function/notes ............................. 194
Switching on/off ........................... 195
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
Switching on/off ........................... 130
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 120
Switching on/off ........................... 118
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 105
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107
Reflective safety jacket .................... 334
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)
Important safety notes .................. 389
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
Important safety notes .................. 150
Refueling process .......................... 151
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 316
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 115
High-beam headlamps ................... 116
Important safety notes .................. 115
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 116
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116
Overview of bulb types .................. 115
Turn signals (front) ......................... 117
Reporting safety defects .................... 32
Rescue card ......................................... 32
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 258
Warning lamp ................................. 283
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 131
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 251
Introduction ..................................... 44
Warning lamp ................................. 282
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Reversing feature
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93
Roller sunblinds ............................... 94
Side windows ................................... 89
Sliding sunroof ................................. 93
Tailgate ............................................ 85
Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 255
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 94
Rear side windows ......................... 306
Roof carrier ........................................ 304
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 333
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 390
Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 232
Route guidance active ...................... 233
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
see Occupant safety
see Operating safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 293
Inserting/removing ........................ 293
Removing ....................................... 293
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Selecting ........................................ 234
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Seat
Correct driver's seat position ........... 97
Index
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 48
Adjusting the height ......................... 48
Cleaning ......................................... 332
Correct usage .................................. 47
Fastening ......................................... 48
Important safety guidelines ............. 46
Introduction ..................................... 45
Releasing ......................................... 48
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 239
Warning lamp ................................. 274
Warning lamp (function) ................... 48
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 101
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99
Calling up a stored setting (memory function) .................................. 109
Cleaning the cover ......................... 332
Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back ................................... 298
Important safety notes .................... 97
Overview .......................................... 97
Seat heating problem .................... 103
Seat ventilation problem ................ 103
Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 108
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 102
Section
Sliding sunroof ................................. 92
Securing hooks .................................. 300
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 332
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 330
Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 237
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 388
Coolant (engine) ............................ 388
DEF special additives ..................... 386
Engine oil ....................................... 387
Fuel ................................................ 384
Important safety notes .................. 383
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 389
Washer fluid ................................... 389
Setting the air distribution ............... 129
Setting the airflow ............................ 129
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 240
On-board computer ....................... 238
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 241
Side impact air bag ............................. 51
Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 255
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 329
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 89
Important safety information ........... 88
Opening/closing .............................. 89
Overview .......................................... 88
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91
Resetting ......................................... 91
Reversing feature ............................. 89
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 92
Opening/closing .............................. 93
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Resetting ......................................... 93
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 80
Changing the programming ............. 79
Checking the battery ....................... 80
19
20
Index
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 89
Display message ............................ 273
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77
Important safety notes .................... 77
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79
Loss ................................................. 81
Mechanical key ................................ 79
Overview .......................................... 77
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81
Starting the engine ........................ 137
Smartphone
Starting the engine ........................ 137
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Snow chains
Information .................................... 353
Sockets
Center console .............................. 308
General notes ................................ 308
Luggage compartment ................... 308
Rear compartment ......................... 308
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 288
Special seat belt retractor .................. 60
Specialist workshop ............................ 31
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 232
In the Instrument cluster ................. 37
Segments ...................................... 228
Selecting the display unit ............... 238
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 255
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Start/Stop button
Starting the engine ........................ 137
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 136
STEER CONTROL .................................. 75
Steering
Display message ............................ 272
Steering Pilot
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Display message ............................ 266
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 104
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 103
Button overview ............................... 38
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 229
Cleaning ......................................... 332
Important safety notes .................. 103
Steering wheel heating .................. 104
Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 108
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ................... 104
Switching on/off ........................... 104
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 147
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 241
Stowage areas ................................... 295
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 296
Center console .............................. 297
Center console (rear) ..................... 297
Cup holders ................................... 304
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 297
Glove box ....................................... 296
Important safety information ......... 295
Stowage net ................................... 297
Stowage net ....................................... 297
Summer tires
In winter ........................................ 353
Sun visor ............................................ 305
Suspension setting
AIRMATIC ...................................... 183
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 186
Suspension tuning
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241
SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 30
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 131
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 293
T
Tachometer ........................................ 228
Index
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 271
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
Important safety notes .................... 84
Limiting the opening angle ............... 88
Opening dimensions ...................... 390
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 87
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 86
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85
Power closing .................................. 84
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 383
Information .................................... 381
Tires/wheels ................................. 376
Trailer loads ................................... 394
Vehicle data ................................... 390
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 235
Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 291
Authorizing a mobile phone via the
device manager (connecting) ......... 292
Connecting a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 292
Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 291
Display message ............................ 272
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235
Number from the phone book ........ 235
Redialing ........................................ 235
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 235
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Temperature
Coolant (display in the instrument
cluster) .......................................... 229
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240
Outside temperature ...................... 228
Setting (climate control) ................
Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .....
Through-loading feature ...................
Timing (RACETIMER) .........................
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) .....
Checking manually ........................
Display message ............................
Maximum .......................................
Not reached (TIREFIT) ....................
Notes .............................................
Reached (TIREFIT) ..........................
Recommended ...............................
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................
Important safety notes ..................
Restarting ......................................
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................
Function/notes .............................
General notes ................................
Important safety notes ..................
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ...........................
Restarting ......................................
Warning lamp .................................
Warning message ..........................
Tire pressure table ............................
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes ..................
Storage location ............................
Tire pressure not reached ..............
Tire pressure reached ....................
Using .............................................
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) .................
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) ....................
Bar (definition) ...............................
Changing a wheel ..........................
Characteristics ..............................
Checking ........................................
Curb weight (definition) .................
Definition of terms .........................
Direction of rotation ......................
Display message ............................
128
240
298
241
358
357
268
357
338
356
339
354
357
358
358
360
358
358
359
361
361
286
360
355
337
335
338
339
337
370
369
369
371
369
351
370
369
372
268
21
22
Index
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................
DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) .............................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ...............................................
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) .....................................
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) ............................................
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ...........................................
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ..............................
Important safety notes ..................
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ......
Information on driving ....................
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...........
Labeling (overview) ........................
Load bearing index (definition) ......
Load index .....................................
Load index (definition) ...................
M+S tires .......................................
Maximum load on a tire (definition) ...............................................
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) .............................
Maximum tire load .........................
Maximum tire load (definition) .......
MOExtended tires ..........................
Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................
PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ...........................................
Replacing .......................................
Service life .....................................
Sidewall (definition) .......................
Snow chains ..................................
Speed rating (definition) ................
Storing ...........................................
Structure and characteristics
(definition) .....................................
Summer tires in winter ..................
Temperature ..................................
371
369
368
369
370
370
370
351
369
351
370
366
371
368
370
353
370
370
370
368
370
353
371
370
371
352
371
353
370
372
369
353
365
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 371
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 370
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 370
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 369
Tire size (data) ............................... 376
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 366
Tire tread ....................................... 352
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 370
Total load limit (definition) ............. 371
Traction ......................................... 365
Traction (definition) ....................... 371
Tread wear ..................................... 365
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight) (definition) ................. 371
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 364
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 369
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 371
Wheel and tire combination ........... 376
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 369
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 62
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 348
Important safety notes .................. 345
Towing a trailer
Axle load, permissible .................... 394
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 331
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 222
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 224
Driving tips .................................... 220
Important safety notes .................. 219
Installing the ball coupling ............. 221
Lights display message .................. 255
Mounting dimensions .................... 394
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
Power supply ................................. 225
Pulling away with a trailer .............. 138
Removing the ball coupling ............ 224
Trailer loads ................................... 394
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 345
Installing the towing eye ................ 346
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 348
Removing the towing eye ............... 346
Index
Transporting the vehicle ................
With both axles on the ground .......
Towing eye .........................................
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Manual ..................................................
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating the warning function ....................................
Display message ............................
Function/notes .............................
Important safety notes ..................
Instrument cluster display .............
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ...............................................
Trailer towing
Active Blind Spot Assist .................
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............
Blind Spot Assist ............................
Permissible trailer loads and
drawbar noseweights .....................
Transfer case .....................................
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display .........
Transporting the vehicle ..................
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill .....................................
Driving downhill .............................
Maximum gradient-climbing capability ...............................................
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
Trip computer (on-board computer) ..................................................
Trip odometer
Calling up .......................................
Resetting (on-board computer) ......
Trunk
see Tailgate
Turn signals
Display message ............................
Replacing bulbs (front) ...................
Switching on/off ...........................
347
346
335
287
236
263
203
204
204
224
210
213
206
224
150
145
347
169
169
168
332
231
231
232
255
117
111
Two-way radio
Frequencies ...................................
Installation .....................................
Transmission output (maximum) ....
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (definition) .................................................
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
381
381
381
371
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 83
Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 240
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 294
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 306
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 31
Data acquisition ............................... 32
Display message ............................ 270
Equipment ....................................... 28
Individual settings .......................... 238
Limited Warranty ............................. 32
Loading .......................................... 361
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77
Lowering ........................................ 375
Maintenance .................................... 29
Operating safety .............................. 30
Parking .......................................... 156
Parking for a long period ................ 159
Pulling away ................................... 138
Raising ........................................... 373
Reporting problems ......................... 31
Securing from rolling away ............ 372
Towing away .................................. 345
Transporting .................................. 347
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77
Vehicle data ................................... 390
23
24
Index
Vehicle battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data ....................................... 390
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ............ 393
Fording depth ................................ 392
Maximum gradient climbing ability .................................................. 393
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 390
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 382
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC ...................................... 185
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 260
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 335
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 234
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
VIN ...................................................... 382
Seat ............................................... 383
Type plate ...................................... 382
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 277
Brakes ........................................... 276
Coolant .......................................... 283
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 285
Distance warning ........................... 285
Engine diagnostics ......................... 283
ESP® .............................................. 279
ESP® OFF ....................................... 280
Fuel tank ........................................ 283
Overview .......................................... 37
Parking brake ................................ 282
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 45
Reserve fuel ................................... 283
Restraint system ............................ 282
Seat belt ........................................ 274
Tire pressure monitor .................... 286
Warranty .............................................. 28
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 272
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 376
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 375
Wheel chock ...................................... 372
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 371
Checking ........................................ 351
Cleaning ......................................... 329
Emergency spare wheel ................. 376
Important safety notes .................. 351
Information on driving .................... 351
Interchanging/changing ................ 371
Mounting a new wheel ................... 374
Mounting a wheel .......................... 372
Overview ........................................ 351
Removing a wheel .......................... 374
Snow chains .................................. 353
Storing ........................................... 372
Tightening torque ........................... 375
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 376
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 252
Operation ......................................... 51
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 129
Infrared reflective .......................... 320
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 325
Important safety notes .................. 389
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Rear window wiper ........................ 118
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118
Replacing the wiper blades
(MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............ 119
Switching on/off ........................... 117
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 164
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 353
Radiator cover ............................... 322
Index
Winter tires
M+S tires .......................................
Wiper blades
Cleaning .........................................
Replacing .......................................
Replacing (rear window) ................
Replacing (windshield) ...................
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
353
329
118
120
118
332
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 129
25
Digital Operator's Manual
26
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system.
i You will not incur any costs when calling up
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view.
RKeyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by entering characters. Further
information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND"
section under the "Character entry (telephony)" keyword.
RContents
You can select individual sections in the contents.
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Press the Ø button on the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The menu for the Digital Operator's Manual
appears.
X
Operating the Digital Operator's Manual
General notes
Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 288).
Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means of
a visual search, a keyword search or using the
contents.
To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the controller.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
8 the controller to the left :.
X
To select information text or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
down =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
X To call up the menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
General notes
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating
conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Ralways
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Ravoid
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Rswitch
Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you
to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
Introduction
Protecting the environment
27
Introduction
28
Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (Y page 382).
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
Operator's Manual
The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment
i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
i This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase contract documentation
for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems
in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
Service and vehicle operation
Maintenance
USA only:
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service
advisor will record every service for you in the
Service and Warranty Booklet.
Canada only:
Have every service in a qualified specialist workshop confirmed in the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
RService facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
Introduction
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is
driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction
of a less serious nature than category (1)
has been subject to repair four or more
times and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its
repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
29
30
Operating safety
Introduction
Sports Utility Vehicle
G WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
may start to skid and roll over in the event of
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always
wear your seat belts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe
vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any
interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.
Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and modifications
Rwork on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe vehicle technical data
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with
the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Z
31
Introduction
Operating safety
Introduction
32
Data stored in the vehicle
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correct operation of your vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle. Damage to the vehicle which is caused by violation
of these notes is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new
or used-vehicle warranty.
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information at
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data stored in the vehicle
Information from electronic control
units
There are electronic control units installed in
your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for
your vehicle to operate safely, while some offer
support during driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort
and entertainment functions that are also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data storage
systems that can temporarily or permanently
save technical information concerning the vehicle's condition, component stress and maintenance requirements as well as technical events
and malfunctions.
This information generally documents the condition of a component, a module, a system or the
surroundings, for example:
Roperating states of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle or its
individual components (e.g. wheel rpm/
speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, indication of whether seat belts are fastened)
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
Rinformation about events leading to vehicle
damage
Rsystem responses in special driving situations
(e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems)
Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to performing the actual control unit
function, these data are used by manufacturers
to detect and rectify malfunctions and to optimize vehicle functions. Most of these data are
volatile and processed only in the vehicle itself.
Only a small part of the data is stored in event or
malfunction memories.
When you use services, the technical data from
the vehicle can be read out by service network
employees or third parties. Services can include
repair services, maintenance processes, warranty cases and quality assurance measures.
The data is read out via the legally prescribed
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The relevant offices in the service network or third parties collect, process and use the data. These
data document the vehicle's technical states,
are used to help in finding malfunctions and
improving quality and are sent to the manufacturer where necessary. In addition, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. The manufacturer needs technical data from vehicles for
this purpose.
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be
reset by a service center during repair or service
work.
You can incorporate data into the vehicle's comfort and infotainment functions yourself as part
of the selected equipment.
These include, for example:
Rmultimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
Raddress book data for use in conjunction with
an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
Rnavigation destinations that have been
entered
Rdata about using Internet services
These data can be saved locally in the vehicle or
are located on a device that you have connected
to the vehicle. If this data is saved in the vehicle,
you can delete it at any time. These data are sent
to third parties only at your request, particularly
when you use online services in accordance with
the settings that you have selected.
You can save and change comfort settings/
customizations in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the piece of equipment in question, these can include, for example:
Rseat and steering wheel position settings
Rsuspension and climate control settings
Rcustom settings such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you
can connect your smartphone or another mobile
end device to the vehicle. You can control this by
means of the control elements integrated in the
vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound
can be output via the multimedia system. Specific items of information are also sent to your
smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, this can
include:
Rgeneral vehicle information
Rposition data
This allows the use of selected smartphone
apps, such as navigation or music player apps.
There is no additional interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active
access to vehicle data. The type of additional
data processing is determined by the provider of
the app being used. Whether you can configure
settings for it and, if so, which ones, depends on
the app and your smartphone's operating system.
Service provider
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, data can be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is made possible by the vehicle's
own transmitter and receiver or by mobile devices that you have brought into the vehicle (e.g.
smartphones). Online functions can be used via
this wireless network connection. These include
online services and applications/Apps provided
by the manufacturer or other providers.
Services provided by the manufacturer
In the case of the manufacturer's online services, the manufacturer describes the functions
in a suitable place and the associated information subject to data protection legislation. Personal data can be used in order to provide online
services. The data exchange for this takes place
via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufacturer's IT systems intended for the purpose. Collecting, processing and using personal data
beyond the provision of services is permitted
only on the basis of a statutory permit or declaration of consent.
Z
33
Introduction
Data stored in the vehicle
Introduction
34
Data stored in the vehicle
You can usually activate and deactivate the services and functions (some of which are subject to
charge). In many cases, this also applies to the
vehicle's entire data connection. However, this
does not apply in particular to legally prescribed
functions and services such as the "eCall" emergency call system.
Services from third parties
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are the responsibility
of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
of use. The manufacturer has no influence over
the content exchanged here.
For this reason, please ask the service provider
for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data
when services are provided by third parties.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
relating to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
operating
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
RHow fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Information on copyright
Introduction
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
35
Information on copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and, including updates, on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
36
Cockpit
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shifter
147
;
Combination switch
111
=
Instrument cluster
37
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever
143
B
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display
189
C
Overhead control panel
42
D
Climate control systems
122
E
Ignition lock
Start/Stop button
135
135
Function
Page
F
Adjusts the steering wheel
manually
103
G
Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically
Steering wheel heating
103
104
H
Cruise control lever
170
I
Opens the hood
321
J
Diagnostics connection
K
Electric parking brake
157
L
Light switch
110
31
Instrument cluster
37
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
:
Page
Speedometer with segments
Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP® OFF
! ABS
Brakes
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
L Low-beam headlamps
T Parking lamps
÷ ESP®
K High-beam headlamps
Electric parking brake (red)
F (USA only)
! (Canada only)
! Electric parking brake
(yellow)
· Distance warning
228
;
#! Turn signals
111
=
Multifunction display
230
Function
?
279
277
276
111
111
279
111
282
A
B
282
285
i Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be
C
Page
Tachometer
Warning and indicator lamps:
R Rear fog lamp
; Check Engine
h Tire pressure monitor
6 Restraint system
ü Seat belts
% Diesel engine: preglow
é RBS (Recuperative
Brake System)
228
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolant
229
111
283
286
45
274
137
283
Fuel level indicator
Warning and indicator lamps:
8 Reserve fuel with fuel
filler flap location indicator
(right-hand side)
283
Instrument cluster lighting
228
found under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 228).
38
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Multifunction display
;
Multimedia system display
=
?
Switches on voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Control System
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or ends a call
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial memory
i In vehicles with multimedia system
Page
230
Function
?
235
COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions
=;
Selects a menu
9:
Selects a submenu or scrolls
through lists
a
Confirms a selection
Hides display messages
%
Back
Switches off voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Control System
Page
229
229
229
243
229
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20
you can find further information:
the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating
instructions
Ron
Center console
39
Center console
At a glance
Center console, upper section
Function
Page
:
Multimedia system; see the
Digital Operator's Manual
;
c Seat heating
101
=
s Seat ventilation
102
?
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
187
A
è ECO start/stop function
139
Function
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
C
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps
Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
D
å ESP®
Page
112
45
75
70
40
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
i Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package
Function
F
Page
Stowage compartment
Cup holder
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
297
304
307
307
308
G
Selector wheel for level control
179
H
à DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation)
213
I
r Manual gearshifting
(permanent setting)
147
J
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
142
K
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
296
Function
L
Touchpad; see Digital Operator's Manual
M
% Back button (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
N
Multimedia system controller; see Digital Operator's
Manual
O
g Switches to the favorites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
P
Switches to the vehicle settings display (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
Q
+ LOW RANGE off-road
gear
Page
216
41
At a glance
Center console
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package and
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Function
F
Page
Function
L
% Back button (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
Page
Stowage compartment
Cup holder
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
297
304
307
307
308
M
Multimedia system controller; see Digital Operator's
Manual
N
G
à DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation)
g Switches to the favorites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
213
O
H
r Manual gearshifting
(permanent setting)
147
I
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
142
J
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
Switches to the vehicle settings display (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
AMG adaptive sport suspension system (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
186
296
Á Level control
185
K
Touchpad; see Digital Operator's Manual
P
Overhead control panel
42
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function
1
Page
:
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off
114
;
c Switches the front interior lighting on
114
=
u Switches the rear interior lighting on or off
114
?
| Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off
A
p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off
B
3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and roller sunblinds
114
Function
C
Eyeglasses compartment
297
D
F Breakdown assistance
call button (mbrace system)
311
E
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
310
F
ï Info call button
(mbrace system)
312
G
Rear-view mirror
105
H
Buttons for the garage door
opener
319
I
Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and the Voice
Control System1
114
94
Page
The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate operating instructions.
Door control panel
43
At a glance
Door control panel
Function
Page
Function
Page
:
Opens the door
83
B
;
% & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
W Opens/closes the side
windows
89
83
C
=
r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and steering
column (memory function)
q Opens/closes the tailgate
87
D
6 Plug-in hybrid: Unlocks
the fuel filler flap
E
n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
compartment
?
Adjusts the seats
A
7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically
108
97
105
65
Occupant safety
44
Safety
Panic alarm
To activate: press ! button : for
approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
X
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 97).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 49).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 56).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
as on child restraint systems (Y page 59).
Important safety notes
Occupant safety
G WARNING
Introduction to the restraint system
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
RSeat belt system
RAir bags
RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 47)
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 97)
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate a person with
disabilities, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details. USA only: for further
information contact our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched
on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
G WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for example the Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
RChildren in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and
size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you
will also find instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 45) and "Air bags"
(Y page 49). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
Z
45
Safety
Occupant safety
Safety
46
Occupant safety
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
RSeat belts
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
RSeat belt force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in addition to other systems, the Emergency Tensioning Device could also be triggered in the event of an accident and would
need to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.
G WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened
(Y page 47)
their seat belts correctly
Rhave
the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 97)
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
systems.
Occupant safety
G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
Rthey
are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modified.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
when necessary. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
that:
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted
Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
section of the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt
Infants and children must never travel sitting
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 295).
Z
Safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 51)
47
Occupant safety
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Releasing seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 47).
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Safety
48
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment
Basic illustration
X Adjust the seat (Y page 97).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
and engage belt tongue ; into belt
buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 48).
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up.
The belt outlet will engage in various positions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
the belt outlet down.
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 60).
The belt adjustment is a convenience function
integrated into PRE-SAFE®. With this function,
the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occupant.
The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:
Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and
Rthe ignition is switched on
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected between
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
grab hold of the seat belt.
The belt adjustment can be switched on and off
using the on-board computer (Y page 239).
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If the front doors are closed
and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Occupant safety
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 56).
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
Rhave
fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants.
RAdjust
the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in an almost upright position. The center of
the head restraint must support the head at
about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forward or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag.
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under twelve years of
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated
(Y page 45).
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.
Z
Safety
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again.
49
Safety
50
Occupant safety
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place
G WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front air bags
! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the system
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
the front-passenger side may be triggered
and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 45).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 51). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
not lit (Y page 52)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Driver's knee bag
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column. The driver's knee bag is deployed
together with the front air bag.
Occupant safety
Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
RHead
RNeck
RArms
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on
the side on which the impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys under the following conditions:
Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Window curtain air bags
Safety
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant
in the driver's seat.
51
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 56).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Z
Safety
52
Occupant safety
In the following situation, the side impact air bag
and the Emergency Tensioning Device are deactivated:
ROCS has not categorized the person on the
front-passenger seat as an adult or a person
of corresponding stature and
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue of the seat belt is
not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt
buckle
Occupant Classification System operation (OCS)
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger:
Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion of
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 253). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
Occupant safety
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
Rthe person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag
can deploy in the event of an accident. The
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 55).
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
event of an accident:
Rcome
into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:
RThe
front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Z
Safety
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
53
54
Occupant safety
Safety
RThe
front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp light up simultaneously. The frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,
the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
System self-test
G DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not light up during the system self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
Occupant safety
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
front air bag (Y page 52). If the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System"
(Y page 55).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54).
Z
Safety
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
55
56
Occupant safety
Safety
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 52).
passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature correX
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an
Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR
OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or
seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is:
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Runoccupied
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the
weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
twelve months old in a
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
child restraint system
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
continue to perform their protective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
G WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous
situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and some powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people with
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
Rduration
Rdirection
Rintensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or
rear collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
Rthe ignition is switched on
Rthe components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 45)
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
the belt buckle of the respective front seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of the
lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
deactivated depending on the person on the
front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
BAG indicator lamps (Y page 45).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is
reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment should take place in good
time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
and the direction of the force are essentially
determined by:
Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
Z
57
Safety
Occupant safety
Safety
58
Occupant safety
they provide an indication of air bag deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable
components of the restraint system are
deployed independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident.
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer
seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system
determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat
belt
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems work independently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident:
RFrontal collision
RSide impact
RRollover
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection system)
Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an
accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance PLUS
package: when Active Brake Assist intervenes
powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
an imminent danger of collision in certain situations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
Rvehicles with the memory function: the frontpassenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest
is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour
seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is
reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®
can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly
when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 48).
X
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance PLUS package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive
measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention
of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up.
When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Parking Pilot,
PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
are pre-tensioned.
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rearend collision is imminent:
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver
applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled:
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
gear is engaged
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
detected
Rif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an
intention to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
Automatic measures after an accident
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised when
the driver's door is opened
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
is cut off
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
Z
59
Safety
Children in the vehicle
Safety
60
Children in the vehicle
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 51)
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 47).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
Rrelease
Special seatbelt retractor
Rshift
G WARNING
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
X
Children in the vehicle
Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back
towards the belt sash guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest
must be folded back as far as possible.
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 295).
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems
are:
Rthe
seat belt system
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
information on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also
find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag.
Rthe
Z
Safety
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled.
X Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
61
Safety
62
Children in the vehicle
All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
otherwise be damaged.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system
G WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems in which the child is secured using the
safety belt integrated in the child restraint
system, the maximum permissible weight of
the child and child restraint system together
is 73 lbs (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated safety belt no longer offers
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system may be overloaded, and the child may not be restrained in
an accident, for example. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use
only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system in which the child is also secured with the
vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
available.
Regularly check that the permissible gross
weight of the child together with the child
restraint system is still maintained.
Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing
system for specially designed child restraint
systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of
Children in the vehicle
Make sure that the backrest in the rear compartment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly on
the seat backrest.
Top Tether anchorages
Guide Top Tether belt B down between cargo
compartment cover : and seat backrest ;.
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
Make sure that:
X
RTop
Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown.
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
backrest ; and cargo compartment
cover : if cargo compartment cover : is
installed.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo
net is installed.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint = back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 100). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt B.
Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat
General notes
Top Tether anchorages ? are located on the
rear side of the seat backrests.
Move head restraint = upwards
(Y page 100).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint
= between the two head restraint bars.
X
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard
Z
Safety
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Adjust the rear seat
backrests so that they are in an upright position.
63
64
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not touch
the roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to
the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint
system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If
necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the
front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
Roperate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
Rthe
Rthe
rear doors (Y page 65)
rear side windows (Y page 65)
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Pets in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
Override feature for the rear side windows
Safety
G WARNING
X
To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear compartment.
Pets in the vehicle
You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
65
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Ractivate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box.
Z
66
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
Safety
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 66)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 70)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 72)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
(Y page 72)
RSteering Pilot STEER CONTROL
(Y page 75)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"
section (Y page 351).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 277) and display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 244).
Braking
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
X To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
X
Driving safety systems
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the offroad program is activated on:
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214)
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 215)
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This
limits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
X
Active Brake Assist
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and situation-dependent braking assistance
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in
front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
audible collision warning, autonomous braking
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist supports you with situationdependent braking assistance.
Active Brake Assist is only available in certain
countries.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just been
carried out
Observe the notes in the section on breakingin (Y page 134).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Z
Safety
Off-road ABS
67
68
Driving safety systems
Safety
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is automatically active after
switching on the ignition.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 237) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are
also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic display.
If DSR (Y page 213) is activated, Active Brake
Assist is deactivated.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
G WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
Rto
people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
road and traffic conditions.
G WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.
Rnot
Function
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
the distance warning function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the ·
distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the
distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked
vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
braking function.
Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
the autonomous braking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Driving safety systems
Situation-dependent braking assistance
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
the path of your vehicle for an extended period
of time.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, situationdependent braking assistance adapts to the situation and automatically increases the brake
pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic
situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance provides braking assistance in hazardous situations
at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar
sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is capable of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
over the period of observation, up to vehicle
speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
Situation-dependent braking assistance reacts
to stationary obstacles up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h).
If situation-dependent braking assistance
demands particularly high brake pressure, preventative passenger protection measures (PRESAFE®) are triggered simultaneously
(Y page 58).
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then
deactivated.
X
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
Rintervene
unnecessarily
intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Rnot
G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Rto
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene.
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system is still available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
Z
Safety
Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
autonomous braking function is available in the
following speed ranges:
R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)
are activated simultaneously (Y page 58).
69
70
Driving safety systems
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Safety
tion (Y page 66).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
In appropriate driving situations, activate the
offroad program:
X Vehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214)
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 215)
Offroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
An ETS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once an offroad program is activated:
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214)
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 215)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate the
vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a
brake test dynamometer. Switch off the ignition.
Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or perform-
ance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle
dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle
on such a dynamometer, please consult a
qualified workshop. You could otherwise
damage the drive train or the brake system.
ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning
lamp is lit continuously.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning
lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available
due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 279) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 244).
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
Driving safety systems
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
If ESP® intervenes:
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
ESP®
Do not deactivate
under any circumstances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
X
71
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Safety
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
ESP® was deactivated before the engine was
automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP®
is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
which provides better grip.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP®
no longer improves driving stability.
torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated.
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes.
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
is no longer available; nor is it activated if you
brake firmly with assistance from ESP®
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
REngine
Z
72
Driving safety systems
Safety
Offroad ESP® (vehicles with Offroad
Engineering package)
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the offroad program is activated on:
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214)
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 215)
Offroad ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is
oversteering or understeering, thus improving
traction.
Crosswind Assist
General information
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in
ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the
direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle.
ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking to
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight
ahead or cornering gently.
Important safety notes
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is
switched off or deactivated because of a malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 277) as well as display
messages (Y page 246).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 182) and hill start
assist (Y page 139).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function
General information
i Pay attention to the important safety notes
in the "Driving safety systems" section
(Y page 66).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can help you to minimize the risk of a collision
with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce
the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically and, if necessary, your brake application will be assisted according to the situation. If you do not react, the system can also
react by braking automatically. In the event of a
detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,
you will also be visually and acoustically warned
as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect
according to the situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to assist you when driving, the radar sensor
system and the camera system must be operational.
Driving safety systems
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 73).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
will initially brake your vehicle by a partial
application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision
unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision
cannot always be avoided, particularly when
approaching at too high a speed. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes,
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full
braking pressure.
G WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
cannot always clearly identify objects and
complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function might:
Rissue
an unnecessary warning or engage
give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Rneither
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, especially
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a
non-critical driving situation.
G WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
cannot always clearly identify people, particularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, especially
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
you must apply the brakes yourself.
G WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
does not react:
Rto
small people, e.g. children
Rto animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rwhen cornering
As a result, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function may not warn you or engage in
all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
Rthere
is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Z
Safety
If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer
available. The brake system is still available with
complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
The radar sensor system and camera system
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to detect obstacles that are in the path of
your vehicle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as body contours and the posture of a
person standing upright.
73
Driving safety systems
74
Safety
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor
system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
being low in the sky
Rdarkness
Ror if:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
of the vehicle
- the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
- the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
To activate or deactivate: activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function using the on-board computer
(Y page 237).
If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function is deactivated, the æ symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
If you have activated DSR (Y page 213), the
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
deactivated.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly approach a
vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone
will then sound and the · distance warning
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
X
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can also brake the vehicle automatically under
the following conditions:
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat
belts fastened
and
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function may react to:
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
i If there is an increased risk of a collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 58).
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking, up
to the point of full brake application. Automatic
emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or during autonomous braking, braking
assistance is provided according to the situation. If necessary, this increases the brake pressure up to full brake application.
To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function calculates the brake force
necessary if:
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
has detected a risk of a collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
activated. The increase in brake pressure from
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
carried out at the last possible moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Protection against theft
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid
No steering assistance is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
RESP®
is deactivated
is malfunctioning
Rthe steering is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
RESP®
Safety
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function assists you with braking in hazardous situations with:
Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehicle
Robstacles crossing your path that move in the
detection range of the sensors and are detected
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further
Ractivating kickdown
Rreleasing the brake pedal
The braking application of Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function is ended automatically if:
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle
75
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
X
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66).
Z
Protection against theft
76
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X To switch off using the SmartKey: unlock
the vehicle with the SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock
the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Safety
X
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
X To switch the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
or
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
X
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection. The emergency
call system sends the message or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
Start function key in the temperature-controlled
cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO Start function key will not be detected.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
the Start/Stop button.
SmartKey functions
Opening and closing
SmartKey
Rrelease
Rshifting
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.
77
: & To lock the vehicle
; F To open/close the tailgate
= % To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button.
If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe
vehicle is locked again.
protection is reactivated.
Ranti-theft
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
following components:
Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 239).
You will receive visual and acoustic locking confirmation if all components were able to be
locked.
Z
SmartKey
78
If activated in the multimedia system, the locator lighting also lights up in the dark (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
X To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
press the F button on the SmartKey.
When the tailgate closes you can then release
the button.
Opening and closing
X
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 137).
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey
is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a
radio connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey. This happens:
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile driving
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Rduring convenience closing
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience closing
feature (Y page 90).
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the
cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.
X
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
conserving battery power. For the purposes of
activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
nearby.
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 80).
X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
SmartKey
Mechanical key
General notes
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle (Y page 137).
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously
for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 80).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 78).
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 80).
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
the driver's door (Y page 84)
RUnlocking the cargo compartment
(Y page 88)
RLocking the vehicle (Y page 84)
RUnlocking
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
Z
Opening and closing
KEYLESS-GO start function
79
80
SmartKey
SmartKey battery
Checking the battery
Opening and closing
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special
collection point for used batteries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 80).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
X
i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
SmartKey
X
81
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Opening and closing
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey.
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
The SmartKey is faulty.
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
Z
82
SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Opening and closing
X
The engine cannot be
The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key.
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 342).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
X
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
You have lost a SmartKey.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
X
X
X
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Front door: pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X Rear door: pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up
and the door unlocks.
X Pull door handle ; again.
The door can be opened.
X
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. The buttons are located on both front
doors.
Rshifting
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65).
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside, opening a door from the inside will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off
the alarm (Y page 75).
To unlock: press button :.
To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked from the
outside.
You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
X
X
Z
Opening and closing
Doors
83
Cargo compartment
84
Automatic locking feature
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
using the mechanical key
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
Opening and closing
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then
proceed to lock the driver's door using the
mechanical key.
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.
You could therefore be locked out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer
(Y page 239).
X
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and tailgate into
their locks automatically even if they are not
completely closed.
X To power close a door: push the door into
the lock up to the first detent position.
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X To power close the tailgate: lightly press
the tailgate downwards.
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully
closed.
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.
X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
far as it will go to position 1.
X
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 75).
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the
fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm
system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Cargo compartment
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 390).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 295).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out.
Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate:
the tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Runlocked from inside with the emergency
release
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate:
you can:
Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Ropen the tailgate automatically from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Tailgate reversing feature
On vehicles with the tailgate remote closing feature, the tailgate is equipped with automatic
obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If
a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate
when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again
automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not
a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
Rto
soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rover
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
Rpull
or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate or
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Opening and closing manually from
outside
Opening
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Pull handle :.
X Raise the tailgate.
Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if you
pull handle : and then release it, the tailgate
opens automatically.
X
X
Z
Opening and closing
G WARNING
85
Cargo compartment
86
Closing
is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Opening and closing
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
X
X
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo
compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 390).
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
the tailgate (Y page 85).
Opening the tailgate automatically
Opening/closing automatically from
the outside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress
the F button on the SmartKey.
or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Rpull
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
You can open the tailgate automatically with the
SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
or
X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
handle and let it go again immediately.
or
X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull the tailgate upwards.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to open.
Closing the tailgate automatically
Cargo compartment
or
X
To close: press closing button : in the tailgate.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
starting function: press and hold the F
button on the SmartKey until the tailgate
closes.
You can release the button as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
starting function: you can close and lock the
tailgate simultaneously.
X Press locking button ; in the tailgate.
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting
function key is detected outside the vehicle,
the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors
must be shut and the SmartKey located in the
vicinity of the tailgate.
i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed
with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in the
ignition.
If the tailgate touches an object while closing,
the closing procedure is interrupted and the
tailgate reopens.
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting
function key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 390).
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
the tailgate (Y page 85).
Opening and closing
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. In addition, people may be standing in the closing
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To reopen the tailgate pull on the remote operating
switch.
To open: pull remote operating switch : for
the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press remote operating switch for tailgate :
until the tailgate is completely closed.
You can open and close the tailgate from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
X
Z
Opening and closing
X
87
Side windows
88
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Opening
General notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
Opening and closing
open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.
Activating
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
This is possible in the top half of its opening
range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before
the stop.
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button in
the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside
of the tailgate again.
X To save the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until two short
tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating
X
Press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone.
Tailgate emergency release
General notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 390).
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
Rusing the SmartKey, or
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
control panel:
Use the emergency release.
Take mechanical key ; out of the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X Insert mechanical key ; or a suitable tool,
e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening : in the
paneling and push it in.
The tailgate is released.
X Open the tailgate.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Side windows
89
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a side window during the closing
process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature
is only an aid and does not relieve you of the
responsibility of paying attention when closing a
side window.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
Rover
the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side windows
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
:
;
=
?
Front left
Front right
Rear right
Rear left
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch.
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press the switch beyond the pressure
point and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function is available for up to five
minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger
door is opened.
The side windows cannot be operated from the
rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 65).
X
Convenience opening
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.
Z
Opening and closing
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side windows
Opening and closing
90
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the
following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
sunblinds
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's
seat
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey
must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near
the driver's door handle.
The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked.
Convenience opening
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
X Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the
desired position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
roller sunblinds are opened first.
X Press and hold the % button again until the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
in the desired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.
X
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:
Rclose
the side windows
Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblinds.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
RRelease the & button to interrupt the closing procedure.
RPress and hold the % button to open.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior
door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
RTo open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and
the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the
door handle is held but the door is not
opened.
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
Rthe side window (Y page 89)
Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 93)
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel (Y page 93)
Using the SmartKey
The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey
must be near the driver's door handle.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
X Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are
fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until the
roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel close.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Side windows
Using KEYLESS-GO
91
until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel close.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are closed.
X Vehicles with a panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed
sensor surface : on the door handle again
X
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
X
Problems with the side windows
G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Z
Opening and closing
Resetting the side windows
Opening and closing
92
Sliding sunroof
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
X
Remove the objects.
Close the side window.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot
slightly:
see the cause.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
be opened or closed with X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
convenience opening.
(Y page 80).
If a side window will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Sliding sunroof
G WARNING
Important safety notes
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof
variants.
G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
Rduring
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
Sliding sunroof
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.
93
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof
variants.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
Rover
the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press the 2 switch beyond the pressure point, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction.
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
operation is only available if the sliding sunroof
is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
X
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened
or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 93).
Z
Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
Sliding sunroof
94
Keep the 2 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully
opened and closed again (Y page 93).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
X
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Opening and closing
Operating the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
Rduring
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be opened when the roller sunblind is
open.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press/pull the 2 switch beyond the
pressure point, automatic operation is started in
the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
The automatic raising feature is available only
when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing
process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute of
your attentiveness when closing the roller sunblind.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react in particular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers. This means that the reversing feature
cannot prevent someone being trapped in
these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
Sliding sunroof
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing the roller sunblinds
: Opens
; Opens
= Closes
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press the 2 switch beyond the pressure point, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction.
X
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
sunblinds
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully
opened or closed after resetting, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblinds do not move smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can
be fully opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Rpress
Z
Opening and closing
If somebody becomes trapped:
95
96
Sliding sunroof
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
Opening and closing
qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you
cannot see the cause.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Seats
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Ryou
should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
Further related subjects:
RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)
RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
(Y page 103) or electrically (Y page 104)
RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 48).
RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (Y page 105).
RVehicles with memory function: storing the
seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and
Head-up display settings with the memory
function (Y page 108)
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as
possible
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level
by the center of the head restraint
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 49) and "Children in the Vehicle"
(Y page 59).
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Correct driver's seat position
97
98
Seats
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Radjust
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i Further related subjects:
RCargo
compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear bench seat) (Y page 298)
Adjusting the seats electrically
: Head restraint height
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
Seats
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
99
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
SAFE® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
X
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the
height and angle of the head restraints to the
correct position.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.
Observe the important safety notes regarding
the seats (Y page 97).
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
There are several notches.
X To move backwards: press and hold release
button : and push the head restraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
your head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
seat is moved forwards or backwards, the
headrest is moved up or down automatically.
Seats
100
Adjusting the head restraints electrically
X
To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for the head restraint adjustment
(Y page 98) up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press
release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
X
Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
engage in position.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand
side bolster : into the desired position.
X To adjust the fore/aft position of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
your head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.
X
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
backrests
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the
second row of seats. There are several possible
detent positions.
X Pull the left or right release lever ; upwards
in the direction of the arrow until relevant
backrest : is fully released.
X Pull backrest : forwards in the direction of
the arrow and allow it to engage.
X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean
firmly against backrest :.
Seats
Adjusting the multicontour seat
The multicontour seat can be adjusted via the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
101
= Lowers the backrest contour
? Hardens the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.
: Raises the backrest contour
; Softens the backrest contour
Seat heating and seat ventilation
Switching the seat heating on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a
risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
102
Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.
Activating/deactivating seat ventilation
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the blower setting you have selected.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired blower setting is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
X
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature
(Y page 89). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Steering wheel
103
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating or seat
ventilation has switched
off prematurely or cannot be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation will switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
: Release lever
; Adjusts the steering wheel height
= Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
X
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation
104
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
: Adjusts the steering wheel height
; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 104)
RStoring settings (Y page 108)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consuming has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on.
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
Press one of the memory function position buttons. This function is only available on vehicles
with memory function.
G WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Mirrors
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(Y page 239).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will
move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
This occurs irrespective of the position of the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 239).
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in
position 1.
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in
position u or 1 in the ignition lock.
i The steering wheel only moves up if it has
not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also
automatically moved to the previously set position.
The last position of the steering column is stored
when you:
Rswitch the ignition off
Rsave the setting with the memory function
(Y page 108).
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
105
Mirrors
106
G WARNING
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
X
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :.
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if
the rear window defroster is switched on and the
outside temperature is low.
X
Resetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will not
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
locking" function in the on-board computer
(Y page 240).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Briefly press :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 240):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Mirrors
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and the mirror
engages in position audibly.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 105).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the
rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage
reverse gear. You can store this position.
Using reverse gear
RRinse
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press button ;.
X
X
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
107
Memory function
108
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default setting parking position.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position.
X
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using
memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not
be engaged during the process.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press button ;.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the
steps.
Calling up a stored parking position setting
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror
on the driver's side
X
Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition
lock.
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Memory function
Adjust the seat (Y page 98).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 104) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 105).
X Press memory button M and then press memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the
SmartKey has been removed.
109
X
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Calling up a stored setting
Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as
you release the storage position buttons.
X
Z
110
Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on
even during the daytime. In some countries,
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal
requirements and self-imposed obligations.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 111)
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 238)
Lights and windshield wipers
Rthe
Automatic headlamp mode
c is the favored light switch position. The
light setting is automatically selected according
to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions
such as fog, snow or spray):
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
RWith the engine running (USA only): if you
have switched on the Daytime Running
Lights function in the on-board computer,
the daytime running lamps or the parking
lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to c.
Light switch
G WARNING
Operation
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 c Automatic headlamp mode, controlled
by the light sensor
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X Turn the light switch to c.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position u in the ignition lock
The automatic headlamp mode is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
driving position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
light switch to the T position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
Exterior lighting
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is a particularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
in key position u in the ignition lock.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
vehicle).
Vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-hand
and left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) are
always illuminated on the trailer.
Lights and windshield wipers
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Combination switch
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or c.
X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking
lamps or standing lamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps.
111
:
;
=
?
High-beam headlamps
Turn signal, right
High-beam flasher
Turn signal, left
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and
the engine is running.
X
Z
Exterior lighting
112
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 113).
Lights and windshield wipers
Hazard warning lamps
Intelligent Light System
General notes
The Intelligent Light System is a system that
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the
prevailing driving and weather conditions. It
offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the
vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering
light function, highway mode and extended
range fog lamps. The system is only active when
it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent
Light System" using the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
Active light function
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding
side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
X
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch
on if:
Ran air bag is deployed or
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
The active light function is a system that moves
the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant
areas remain illuminated while driving. This
allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists
and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active
light function evaluates the course of the lane in
which you are driving and adjusts the light in
advance.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
Rif
you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
Exterior lighting
Highway mode
Highway mode increases the range of the beam.
Active: if you are driving at a speed above
110 km/h and do not make any large steering
movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are
driving at a speed above 130 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
80 km/h following activation.
Extended range fog lamps
The extended range fog lamps reduce the glare
experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the road.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear
fog lamp.
Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you
switch off the rear fog lamp
Off-road lights
The off-road lights facilitate the early recognition of objects/obstacles when driving off-road
thanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter distribution of light from the low-beam headlamps.
Active: when driving at speeds no faster than
30 mph (50 km/h) and the off-road program
selector wheel is in position 1 or 2.
Not active: when driving at speeds above
30 mph (50 km/h).
When the off-road lights are switched on, the
cornering light function is permanently activated, the active light function is deactivated and
the headlamp range control is set to static
mode.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho
have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Rwho
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
The cornering light function is activated on both
sides before entering a traffic circle through an
evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians
crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicle in good time.
113
Interior lighting
114
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out.
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Overhead control panel
: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
; c Switches the front interior lighting on
= v Switches the rear interior lighting on/
off
? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on/off
B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol on
Interior lighting control
General notes
The interior light functions are automatically
switched off after some time to prevent the
vehicle's battery from discharging, unless the
SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
are set using the multimedia system (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
Automatic interior lighting control
To switch on: set the switch to center position B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
X
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically if
the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning
lamp button.
or
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED
headlamps)
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle
are equipped with light-emitting diodes. Do not
replace the vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
out the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.
You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp
setting checked regularly.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its
glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 115).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview of bulb replacement - bulb
types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via
the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
115
116
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Low-beam headlamps
Lights and windshield wipers
Halogen headlamps
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Turn signal: W 5 W BV
Removing and installing the cover in
the front wheel housing
Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 116).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 116).
X
High-beam headlamps
You must remove the cover from the front wheel
housing before you can change the front bulbs.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheel inwards.
X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable tool.
X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide it
down until it engages.
X Insert securing pin ;.
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Pull lever = upwards (headlamps on the left
in the direction of travel) or push it downwards (headlamps on the right in the direction
of travel) and remove bulb holder ;.
X
X
Windshield wipers
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
X
X
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Turn signals
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X
X
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
4
5
B
C
set to high sensitivity)
° Continuous wipe, slow
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
í Single wipe
î To wipe with washer fluid
Switch on the ignition.
Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically according
to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
the rain sensor is more sensitive than in
the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper
to wipe more frequently.
Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the
washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and
when wiping with washer fluid î the washer
fluid is emitted directly from the blades.
X
X
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Simultaneously push down on bulb holder ;
and push lever = downwards (headlamps on
the left in the direction of travel) or pull
upwards (headlamps on the right in the direction of travel).
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clockwise.
117
Windshield wipers
118
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm
has been folded away from the windshield/
rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the
force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Lights and windshield wipers
Switching the rear window wiper on/
off
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 b Wipes with washer fluid
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5 b Wipes with washer fluid
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2
(Y page 135).
X Turn switch : on the combination switch to
the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
X
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Set the windshield wiper to position ° on
the combination switch.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the
hood, turn the SmartKey to position u in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Remove the SmartKey.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Switch off the engine.
Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position.
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper stops.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
X
X
Removing the wiper blades
X
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Windshield wipers
119
As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the
hood, turn the SmartKey to position u in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Remove the SmartKey.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Switch off the engine.
Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position.
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper stops.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
X
X
Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper
blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the
direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
Removing a wiper blade
Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on
the wiper arm and slide it into place in the
direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
X
Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC
VISION CONTROL)
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position
To bring the wiper blade into position to
be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with
one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade in the direction of arrow : beyond the
point of resistance.
The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click.
X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press
release knob ; and pull the wiper blade
upwards =.
X
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Set the windshield wiper to position ° on
the combination switch.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Windshield wipers
120
Installing the wiper blades
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window
until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the direction of the arrow until it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
X
X
Installing a wiper blade
Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.
Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it
engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.
X
X
Push the new wiper blade in the direction of
arrow : onto the wiper arm until lug ;
engages.
X Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow = beyond the
point of resistance.
The wiper blade disengages with an audible
click and is freely movable again.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
Windshield wipers
121
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
122
Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances out of the air.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engine is running.
Optimum climate control is only achieved with
the side windows and roof closed.
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
(Y page 131).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (Y page 89). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 137).
i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
Depending on the operating conditions and
environmental influences, the interval for
replacing the filter may be shorter than specified.
i Vehicles with ionization of the interior
air and air filter: in addition to ionization, the
vehicle has an air filter with anti-allergenic
properties that contribute to improved air filtration.
i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
ces the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey
has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
i Plug-in hybrid vehicles: observe the notes
on climate control in the separate Operator's
Manual.
Overview of climate control systems
123
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
USA only
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 130)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Rear control panel
Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
124
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Canada only
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 131)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Rear control panel
Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Overview of climate control systems
125
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
USA only
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 130)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Display
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 128)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Rear control panel
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Sets the temperature (Y page 128)
Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
126
Canada only
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 131)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Display
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 128)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Rear control panel
Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
Sets the temperature (Y page 128)
Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Operating the climate control systems
The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of the dual-zone automatic climate control or 3-zone automatic climate control.
RYou can switch on climate control by using the
à and ¿ or à and Á buttons.
The indicator lamps in the à and
¿ buttons or the à and Á buttons
light up.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate
control: in automatic mode, you can also use
the ñ button to set a climate mode
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM
level is recommended.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate
control: use the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above
the á button goes out.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate
control: use the "residual heat" function if
you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The
residual heat function can only be activated or
deactivated with the ignition switched off.
RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
system display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 140).
Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating climate control
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly
Activate climate control primarily using the
à button (Y page 128).
In the rear compartment, you can also switch
climate control on and off using the à and
^ buttons.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
X
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the ¿ or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.
X
Climate control
Optimum use of automatic climate
control
127
Operating the climate control systems
128
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Climate control
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal¿ or Á button
function.
flashes three times or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot
be switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
In the rear compartment, you can also switch
climate control for the rear seats to automatic
mode using the à button.
Automatic control
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X To switch to manual mode: press the _
button.
3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 128).
X
Adjusting the climate mode settings
You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draftfree setting
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press the à button.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the display.
X
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
B counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 123).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
3-zone automatic climate control
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
as for the rear compartment.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase or decrease temperature in
the front compartment: turn control : or
B counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 125).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Operating the climate control systems
Setting
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
X
Setting the airflow
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase: press the K button.
X To reduce: press the I button.
X
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-
trol to set the airflow in the rear compartment
separately.
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Front control panel
P Directs the airflow through the center
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
S Directs the airflow through the center
and footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the defroster
and center vents (Canada only)
a Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the defroster,
center and footwell air vents (Canada
only)
Rear control panel
M Directs the airflow through the rear center and B-pillar air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
i Using the rear control panel, you can also
activate both air distribution positions simultaneously. In order to do this, press both air
distribution buttons. The air is then routed
through all rear air vents.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed
when the controls on the side air vents are
turned downwards.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button
lights up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side and the
rear compartment.
X To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment.
X
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Climate control
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is adopted for the rear compartment and the
front-passenger side.
X Turn thumbwheel : to the left or right
(Y page 125).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or decrease the rear compartment temperature using the rear control
panel: turn control M counter-clockwise or
clockwise on the rear control panel
(Y page 125).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
129
Operating the climate control systems
130
Activating/deactivating
Climate control
Defrosting the windows
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following settings:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
"windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 129).
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
Activate the windshield wipers.
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the display.
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
X
X
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
X
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
not fog up so quickly.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
X
Operating the climate control systems
131
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.
X
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the d button.
The indicator lamp in the d button lights
up.
i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone
automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is
automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the d button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.
X To deactivate: press the d button.
The indicator lamp in the d button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
X
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available on
vehicles for Canada.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the stationary
vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has
been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the Ì or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
lights up.
i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
X
i If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter
approximately 30 minutes
the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rwhen
Ionization
Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle
interior and attain an improved interior climate.
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Climate control
132
Setting the air vents
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior.
You can switch ionization on and off via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air
vent on the driver's side must be open.
Setting the center air vents
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
:
;
=
?
X
Center air vent, left
Center air vent, right
Center vent thumbwheel, right
Center vent thumbwheel, left
To open or close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? to the left or right.
Setting the side air vents
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the
engine compartment on the front-passenger
side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or
leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the
sliders of the air vents to the center position.
Example
: Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent, left
= Thumbwheel for side air vent
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
Setting the air vents
133
: Air vent control
; Air vent
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to
cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on
the airflow and air distribution settings.
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to the
right or left.
: B-pillar air vent
; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
left or right.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
Setting the center vents in the rear compartment
Example: center vents with rear control panel
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
Z
Climate control
Setting the B-pillar air vent
Driving and parking
134
Driving
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Driving
Important safety notes
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this
teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area
of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
drive in the Comfort drive program.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes
with thick soles
with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
Rshoes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat
and cause a fire
its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Rlose
! Do not warm up the engine while stationary.
Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine
speeds and full throttle until the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
engage positions P and R only when the vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to
protect the engine. To protect the engine and
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not recognize dangers.
Key positions
locked. To unlock, remove the SmartKey and
reinsert it into the ignition lock.
The steering is locked when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is
switched off.
The starter battery could otherwise be discharged.
If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition
lock, the starter battery may not be charged
sufficiently.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 342).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
SmartKey
General notes
g To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a
SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3 To start the engine
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting
the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 276).
If the SmartKey is in position u in the ignition
lock for a longer period, it can no longer be
turned in the ignition lock. The steering is then
Z
135
Driving and parking
Driving
136
Driving
Do not keep the SmartKey:
electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 305).
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Driving and parking
Rwith
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop : button twice when in
this position
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once when
in this position, the ignition is deactivated
again.
X
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the SmartKey.
It is possible to switch between KEYLESS-GO
mode and key operation only when the transmission is in position j.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting
the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 276).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Driving
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
i You can start the engine in transmission
Rrelease
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
General notes
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds
after a cold start. The sound of the engine may
change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 144).
The transmission position indicator on the
multifunction display shows j
(Y page 145).
position j and i.
To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 135).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 135) and release it as soon
as the engine is running.
X
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can
start the engine without preglow if the engine
is warm.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the
ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be
inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey
must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the
engine operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine start function.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 135).
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine
starts.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
activated and the engine starts.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 136).
You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previously selected climate control setting is
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the journey.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
Z
Driving and parking
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
137
Driving and parking
138
Driving
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
time.
You can only start the engine via your smartphone if:
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
Rpark position j is selected
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
Rthe panic alarm is not activated
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
Rthe hood is closed
Rthe doors are closed and locked
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
G WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 239).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
position P to the desired position if you depress
the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock
released. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
the parking lock remains engaged.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 158).
Pulling away with a trailer
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Rswitch
on the hazard warning lamps
not lock the doors
Ropen the hood
Rdo
Pulling away
General notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake.
X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.
Driving
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
Ryou
are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the ECO
start/stop function in the separate Operator's
Manual.
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
: ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is only available in drive programs
Comfort and Slippery.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green
Rthe Sport Plus drive program is not selected
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
Rthe Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not
selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rno Off-road program has been selected
Z
Driving and parking
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on.
X Depress the accelerator pedal.
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is
held by the driving force of the engine, release
lever :.
the electric parking brake is released.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
139
140
Driving
Driving and parking
Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric
air pressure is within the range that is suitable
for the system
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe hood is closed
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimited.
Ryou
switch to the Offroad or Offroad Plus
drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position P does not
start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Ryou engage reverse gear R
Ryou move the transmission out of position P
Ryou switch to the Sport Plus drive program
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
Ryou switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive
program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Ryou activate manual gearshifting (MercedesAMG vehicles)
Ryou switch to the Offroad drive program
(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package)
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction.
Driving
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
or
141
Activate manual gearshifting (Y page 147).
Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive program (Y page 142).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. When the
Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activated, the automatic transmission switches to
the Comfort drive program.
X
or
To deactivate: in the Comfort drive program, press ECO button :.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction.
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
RThere
RThere
is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock back to position u.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 136). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Driving and parking
X
142
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Vehicles with a gasoline There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine:
component of the engine management system.
The engine is not running X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
smoothly and is misfirOtherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing.
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gage shows a value
longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †).
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 324). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller in the separate
Operator's Manual.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission management)
Rthe transmission
Rthe suspension
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort drive
program is activated. For further information
about starting the engine, see (Y page 136).
The Comfort drive program is recommended in
city traffic and stop/start traffic situations.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as
many times as necessary until the desired
drive program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed in the multimedia system display.
Drive programs available (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
X
Individual
Individual settings
Sport
Sporty driving characteristics
Comfort
Comfortable and economical driving characteristics
Slippery
Optimal driving characteristics on slippery or snowcovered roads
Off-road
Optimal driving characteristics for easily negotiable offroad terrain
Off-road Plus
(vehicles with
Off-Road Engineering package)
Optimal driving characteristics for rough terrain
Sport
Sporty driving characteristics
Sport Plus
Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
Slippery
Optimal driving characteristics on slippery or snowcovered roads
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 146).
Further information on:
Rthe Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slippery
drive programs (Y page 146)
Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without
Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214)
Rthe Off-road and Off-road Plus drive programs (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
package) (Y page 215)
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not recognize dangers.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is
selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed in the multimedia system display.
Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles):
X
Individual
Individual settings
Comfort
Comfortable and economical driving characteristics
Overview of transmission positions
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
Z
143
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
144
Driving and parking
i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission position j, k, i or h is shown on the transmission position display on the multifunction
display (Y page 145).
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is coasting, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from h to k, from k to h
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 182) and
on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174).
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
If the transmission is in position h or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up past the first point of resistance.
X
Shifting to neutral N
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
If the transmission is in position h or k:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts automatically
to j.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
wash:
X
Automatic transmission
Switch on the ignition.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
X
With the Start/Stop button:
Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
X
The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display on the multifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h.
Transmission positions
B
Park position
Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary
(Y page 156). The parking lock
should not be used as a brake when
parking. Always apply the electronic
parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be
locked in position P. Have the vehicle
electronics checked immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Park position P is automatically
engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
Rthe driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving
at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary.
Engaging drive position D
If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
X
Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.
: Transmission position
; Gear
= Drive program
Z
Driving and parking
With the SmartKey:
X
145
146
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
! Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position h. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting back and forth between transmission
positions h and k can help to free up the
vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when
shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly
between transmission positions h and k,
move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
past the point of resistance.
Towing a trailer
Drive in the middle of the engine speed range
on uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,
use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 147) to select a lower gear,
even if cruise control or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC are activated.
X
Drive programs
Slippery drive program
The Slippery drive program has the following
characteristics:
Rreduced engine and transmission settings for
optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-covered roads.
Roptimized ESP® stability control on slippery or
snow-covered roads.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability on
slippery or snow-covered roads, for example.
Comfort drive program
Individual drive program
The Comfort drive program has the following
characteristics:
In the Individual drive program, the following
properties of the drive program can be selected:
Rcomfort-oriented
Rthe
engine and transmission
settings.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
less likely to spin.
Sport drive program
The Sport drive program has the following characteristics:
engine and transmission settings.
automatic transmission shifting up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehicles with AIRMATIC).
drive (engine and transmission management)
Rthe transmission
Rthe suspension
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
the steering
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
availability of the ECO start/stop function
To select the gears in the Individual drive program permanently using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the permanent manual gearshift program.
Information about configuring the Individual
drive program with the multimedia system can
be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Rsporty
Rthe
Drive program Sport Plus (MercedesAMG vehicles)
The Sport Plus drive program has the following
characteristics:
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
vehicle pulling away in first gear.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AIRMATIC).
Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it
can, however, be activated again using the
ECO button (Y page 140).
Rthe
Manual gear shifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
To use manual shifting, you have two options:
Rtemporary setting
Rpermanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the current
gear appears in the multifunction display
instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
will be selected automatically.
Z
147
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
148
Temporary setting
X
or
X
To deactivate: press button :.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.
Driving and parking
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h.
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
X
The temporary setting is active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions, the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, during overrun
mode or when driving on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.
Permanent setting (all vehicles except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h.
X Press button :.
X
To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
X
or
X
To deactivate: press button :.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
switch to the Individual drive program.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Shifting gears
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Automatic transmission
149
display of the instrument cluster, shift to recommended gear ;.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed in the
gear currently engaged is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up to prevent
engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
X
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X When the corresponding gearshift recommendation : appears in the multifunction
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
: Gear indicator
; Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.
X When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
Kickdown
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
possible in the temporary setting.
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving.
Z
Driving and parking
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
150
Refueling
Driving and parking
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC:
The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
is deteriorating.
X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger changes gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC:
The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
is deteriorating.
position N.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.
! Performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
engine and ignition must be switched off
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the electric
parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
seriously damage the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
Refueling
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
G WARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by
the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 384).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 150).
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,
the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in
the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to
the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
151
Refueling
152
Preparing to refuel
Switch off the engine.
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status g.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again.
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may
leak out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
Opening the fuel filler flap
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Driving and parking
X
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.
If you drive at speeds above 1 mph (2 km/h)
with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel Filler
Flap Open message is shown in the multifunction display.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 258).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 283).
X
:
;
=
?
Opens the fuel filler flap
Insert the fuel filler cap
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
Tire pressure table
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of the filler flap in the
direction of arrow ;.
X
i For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 283).
Refueling
153
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The engine does not
start.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G WARNING
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same
as the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 135).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 135).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)
General notes
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing
agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks performed during maintenance.
When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the
Check Additive See Operator's Manual
message is shown in the multifunction display.
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera‐
tor's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.
Z
Driving and parking
Problem
Driving and parking
154
Refueling
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in
the multifunction display.
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message
appears in the multifunction display, you can
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is not
refilled, you will subsequently be unable to
start the engine.
X Add at least 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF.
X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
X Start the engine.
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding
DEF between maintenance intervals. You can
obtain further information from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact
Roadside Assistance (Y page 29).
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
(Ò11 †), it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is
frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it
may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle
in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has
become fluid again. It will then be possible to
add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank
refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment and DEF is available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important safety notes
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
Rnot poisonous
Rcolorless and odorless
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.
Keep DEF away from children.
If you or other persons come into contact with
DEF, observe the following:
RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
soap and water.
RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean
water. Seek medical assistance without
delay.
RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth
out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek
medical assistance without delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
DEF immediately.
! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
! The vehicle must be parked on level ground
to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be
filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a
level surface. This avoids false level readings.
Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle
is not parked on a level surface. There is a
danger of overfilling, which could result in
damage to components of the BlueTEC
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
! Immediately rinse off surfaces which come
into contact with DEF or remove DEF with a
damp cloth and cold water. If DEF has already
crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold
water. DEF residue crystallizes after a short
period and contaminates the affected surfaces. Furthermore, electrical components in
the vicinity may be damaged by DEF.
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the
fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
For further information on DEF, see
(Y page 386).
Refueling
155
Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of
DEF refill canister ;.
X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.
Disposable hose : remains closed until you
fasten disposable hose : to the DEF filler
neck of the vehicle.
X
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
X To open: switch the ignition off.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise and remove it.
DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: place DEF filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
direction of arrow :.
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.
i If the Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message continues to be shown in
the multifunction display, you must add more
DEF.
DEF refill canisters
! Do not screw the disposable hose on too
tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be
damaged and DEF may leak out.
Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
hand-tight. When you feel resistance, disposable hose : is sufficiently secured.
X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ;.
Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely
filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF
refill canister ; can be removed when it has
been only partially emptied.
X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Reseal DEF refill canister ; with the cap.
X
DEF refill canisters are available at many gas
stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler
hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fill the
vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against
Z
Driving and parking
Opening/closing the DEF filler cap
Parking
156
Driving and parking
overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. MercedesBenz offers a special disposable hose with overfill protection. You can obtain this from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is available in a variety of containers and receptacles.
Only use the disposable hose with the
Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.
DEF refill bottle
! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-
tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill
bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak
out.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift
Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
bottle :.
X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck as
shown and screw it on clockwise until handtight.
X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler
neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one
minute.
i When DEF refill bottle : is no longer
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be
taken off again after being only partially emptied.
X Release DEF refill bottle :.
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle : again.
X
DEF refill bottles are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill
bottles without a threaded cap do not provide
overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled.
Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a
threaded seal. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients
Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients
Parking
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Apply the electric parking brake.
Shift the transmission to position j.
X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X With KEYLESS-GO:
Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 135)
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically.
If you then open the driver's or front-passenger
door, the automatic transmission shifts to j
automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
wash:
X Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on the
ignition.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X Switch on the ignition.
X All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
i The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for
three seconds.
X
X
Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the system, it may not be possible to apply the
released parking brake.
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
away.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
i The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine
is switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurring are normal.
Z
Driving and parking
Switching off the engine
157
Parking
158
Driving and parking
Applying or releasing manually
To engage: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is engaged,
the F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster.
i The electric parking brake can also be
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
X To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
i The electric parking brake can only be
released:
Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135) or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake (Y page 138).
X
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position j
and
Rthe engine is switched off or
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
to a standstill or
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
Rthere is a system malfunction
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are
fulfilled:
RThe engine is running.
RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle.
RThe transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or, on a
level surface, shift from transmission position
j to h or k.
RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk
lid must be closed.
If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
belt buckle, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
RThe driver's door is closed.
RYou are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk
lid must be closed.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster.
Driving tips
Emergency braking
159
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake.
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle
of the electric parking brake is pressed. The
longer the electric parking brake handle is
depressed, the greater the braking force.
During braking:
Ra warning tone sounds
Rthe Release Park. Brake message appears
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on
the high-voltage battery in the separate Operator's Manual.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof carriers when they are not needed.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Driving tips
160
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
Have all service and maintenance work carried out at the specified intervals.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.
X
Driving and parking
X
Drinking and driving
G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Emission control
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements.
You can obtain current information concerning
the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a
qualified specialist workshop. This could be an
overview of the maintenance work or any additional maintenance work, for example.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.
:
;
=
?
Acceleration
Coasting
Constant
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and
represents the additional range achieved since
the beginning of the journey as a result of an
adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in
the multifunction display instead of range ?.
The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 283).
The ECO display consists of three sections, with
an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
speeds
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceleration
;
Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: anticipatory
driving, keeping your distance and
early release of the accelerator.
The vehicle can coast without use
of the brakes.
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving
style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as:
Rload
Rtire pressure
Rcold start
Rchoice of route
Relectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO display.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive the vehicle in the Comfort drive program.
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 232).
For further information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 232).
Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
lower gear in good time. This allows you to
take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
Z
161
Driving and parking
Driving tips
162
Driving tips
Driving and parking
This helps you to avoid overheating the
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.
on a slippery road surface. This could cause
damage to the drive train. This type of damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
brakes to rub by constantly applying light pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and
premature wear to the brake pads.
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden.
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You then have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salttreated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
Rif
the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
arrange this.
! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
engine and ignition must be switched off
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the electric
parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so,
depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at a
high speed. This improves the grip of the brake
pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 72).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle
which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent
quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have
not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
or which are not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
High-performance brake system
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The high-performance brake system is designed
for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
RSpeed
RBraking force
REnvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the brake
system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake
discs, depends on the individual driving style
and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.
You can obtain further information about this
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the # brake
wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have
the brake system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed.
Ravoid ruts.
Ravoid sudden steering movements.
Rbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
the depth of any water before driving through
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
the engine compartment. This can damage
the electronic components in the engine or
the automatic transmission. Water can also
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
select the raised vehicle level before driving
through a body of water.
Z
163
Driving and parking
Driving tips
164
Driving tips
Off-road fording
! Under no circumstances should you accel-
erate before entering the water. The bow
wave could cause water to enter and damage
the engine and other assemblies.
Driving and parking
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while
fording. Otherwise, water could get into the
vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's
electronics and interior equipment.
REstablish how deep the water is and the characteristics of the body of water before fording.
RSelect the highest possible vehicle level.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and at
a steady walking pace.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through the
water.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as you
drive.
RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine.
Water offers a high degree of resistance, and
the ground is slippery and in some cases
unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water.
RClean any mud from the tire tread after fording.
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.
Always observe the fording depth values
(Y page 392).
Winter driving
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
! When scraping ice off the rear window, take
care not to damage the rear-window seal or
trim.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X Shift the transmission to position i.
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
corrective steering.
When driving in snow with or without snow
chains, select driving program Slippery
(Y page 142).
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective
cover. The measuring function of the onboard diagnosis system may otherwise provide inaccurate values. Some of these values
are required by law and must therefore always
be accurate.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay
special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 353).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 353).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 371).
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of
gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle
to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill
gradients. There is a risk of an accident.
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe
vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
into the brakes. This could result in a reduced
braking effect or in total brake failure and also in
increased wear and tear. The braking characteristics change depending on the material
entering the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking
effect or grinding noises, have the brake system
checked in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the
different braking characteristics.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to
failure of the mechanical assembly or systems.
Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the
vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not switch to transmission position N when
driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
using the service brake, you could lose control
of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
General notes
H Environmental note
Protection of the environment is of primary
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Observe all prohibiting signs.
Read this section carefully before driving your
vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
gentle off-road terrain first.
Z
165
Driving and parking
Driving tips
Driving and parking
166
Driving tips
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of
your vehicle and the gear shift operation before
driving through difficult terrain.
The following driving systems are specially
adapted to off-road driving:
Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without
Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214)
ROff-road and Off-road Plus drive programs
(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215)
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the
Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 216)
RDifferential lock (vehicles with the Off-Road
Engineering package) (Y page 216)
ROff-road ABS (Y page 67)
ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 70)
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 72)
RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)
(Y page 183)
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
(Y page 213)
Observe the following notes:
RStop the vehicle before starting to drive along
an off-road route. If necessary, select the offroad program (Y page 215) or shift to the
LOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 216).
RSelect a vehicle level that is suitable for the
terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make
sure there is always sufficient ground clearance.
RCheck that items of cargo and loads are
stowed safely and are well secured
(Y page 299).
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate
DSR (Y page 213).
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
when driving down an incline.
RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,
steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower
your speed should be.
RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.
RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road
routes where visibility is poor. For safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first and survey
the off-road route.
RLook
out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,
tree stumps and furrows.
RTake care when turning on an uphill or downhill slope or when driving across a slope. The
vehicle could otherwise tip over.
RAlways keep the doors, the tailgate, the side
windows and the sliding sunroof closed while
the vehicle is in motion.
RDo not shift the automatic transmission to
position i.
RObserve the notes on off-road fording
(Y page 164).
i Information about retrofitting special all-terrain tires is available from any qualified specialist workshop.
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
Checklist before driving off-road
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while
the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a
safe place as soon as possible. Check the
engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp
warning must not be ignored. Continuing the
journey while the symbol is displayed could
lead to engine damage.
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level
and add oil if necessary.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
correct oil supply in the vehicle.
X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the
level and add if necessary (Y page 153).
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack is
working and make sure you have the lug
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding
spade in the vehicle.
X Wheels and tires: check the tread depth and
pressure of the tires.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
tires.
X Replace any missing valve caps.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss
of tire pressure and damage the tire bead.
Driving tips
Checklist after driving off-road
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on normal
roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.
This allows you to detect damage promptly and
reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and
other road users.
X If the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program
is selected: select the Individual, Sport,
Comfort or Slippery drive program
(Y page 142).
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 216).
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 213).
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal
level.
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
check for damage.
X Clean the front and rear license plates.
X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet
and remove any foreign objects.
X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the
vehicle underside with a water jet; check for
any foreign objects and damage.
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants
have become trapped. These increase the risk
of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake
hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints
and propeller shafts.
X After the trip, examine without fail the entire
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, bodywork structure, steering, chassis and exhaust
system for damage.
X After driving for extended periods across
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
and cleaned.
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels
and drive train and remove them if necessary.
Foreign objects can disturb the balance and
cause vibrations.
Driving on sand
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215).
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214).
RSelect a higher vehicle level.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
the terrain.
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
become stuck in loose ground.
RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that:
- the tire ruts are not too deep.
- the sand is sufficiently firm.
- the ground clearance of the vehicle is sufficient.
Tire ruts and gravel roads
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
bottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving along
ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
gravel:
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215).
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214).
RSelect a higher vehicle level.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
RDrive slowly.
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the
wheels of one side on the center grassy area,
if possible.
Z
Driving and parking
Before driving off-road, check the wheels and
replace them if necessary.
167
168
Driving tips
Driving over obstacles
Driving and parking
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask
passengers for guidance when driving over
large obstacles. The passenger should always
keep a safe distance from the vehicle when
doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of
unexpected vehicle movements. After driving
off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle
for possible damage, especially to the underbody and the components of the chassis.
Observe the following rules when driving over
tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215).
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214).
RSelect LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 216)
RRaise the vehicle level.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
RDrive very slowly.
RDrive straight over the center of obstacles.
Traveling uphill
Approach/departure angle
G WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
RObserve
the rules on off-road driving.
RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or
gradients, but instead follow the direct line of
fall.
RWhen driving down an incline, make use of the
engine's braking effect. Observe the engine
speed; do not overrev the engine.
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215).
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214).
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhill
gradients, select the LOW RANGE offroad
gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
package) (Y page 216).
RDrive slowly.
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time
on long and steep downhill gradients.
RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road
driving.
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on
a hill. For further information about hill start
assist, see (Y page 139).
Do not switch to transmission position N when
driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
using the service brake, you could lose control
of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure angle
values (Y page 393).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Always observe the maximum gradient climbing
ability values (Y page 393).
Driving systems
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the
brow.
This style of driving prevents:
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
brow of a hill
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
the other side
Driving downhill
RDrive
slowly.
not drive at an angle down steep inclines.
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the
front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the
vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand paddle shifter before tackling steep downhill gradients.
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of
fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
after a long downhill stretch.
RDo
i The special off-road ABS setting enables a
precise, brief and repeated locking of the
front wheels. This causes them to dig into
loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels
easily skid across the ground surface if completely braked and therefore lose their ability
to steer.
Driving systems
Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems
which enhance comfort and support the driver in
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 66).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. You must select a
lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or
towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of
the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
i Cruise control should not be activated when
driving off-road.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Z
Driving and parking
Hilltops
169
Driving systems
170
Cruise control lever
stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.
Storing or calling up a speed
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Activates or increases speed
Activates or reduces speed
Deactivates cruise control
Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds.
:
;
=
?
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
RDSR must be deactivated.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining a speed
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
X
X
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is operational and when first
activated stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
speed.
X
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.
or
X Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ryou activate DSR
Ryou activate the Offroad Plus program (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Ryou shift the transmission to position N while
driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
i When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
General notes
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed
and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
You must select a lower gear in good time on
long and steep downhill gradients, especially if
the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
so, you will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to
do so.
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driving on roads with steep gradients.
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar
waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Do not tamper with, alter or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
Rpeople
or animals
Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
or parked vehicles
vehicles and crossing traffic
Roncoming
Z
171
Driving and parking
Driving systems
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always
clearly identify other road users and complex
traffic situations.
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
warns you.
G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle
with up to 50% of the maximum possible
deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a
risk of an accident.
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations
and try to take evasive action.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rcan neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics if you fail to adapt
your driving style.
Rcannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions.
Ris only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in your
lane.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
to the speed stored.
This speed may:
Rbe too high if you are driving in a turning lane
or an exit lane
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
lane
Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Driving systems
Activates or increases speed
Activates or reduces speed
Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed
A Sets a specified minimum distance
:
;
=
?
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is ready for use.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must
be closed.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).
RDSR must be deactivated.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =, up : or down ?.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
X
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =, up : or down ? .
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
speed.
X
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Pulling away and driving
If you want to pull away with Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the set speed.
X
Z
Driving and parking
Cruise control lever
173
Driving and parking
174
Driving systems
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically.
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In
this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored.
Selecting the drive program
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty
driving style if you have selected the Sport or
Sport Plus drive program (Y page 146). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set
speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you
have selected the Comfort drive program, the
vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently
detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
becomes too small.
i When you change lanes, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in leftside traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traffic).
Stopping
G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could
roll away if:
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched off
using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
to a stop.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
After a time, the electric parking brake secures
the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance,
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
specified minimum distance is set using the
control on the cruise control lever.
The transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
activated and the vehicle stationary:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
activated and the vehicle stationary:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Driving systems
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down A for a lower speed
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
shorter distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust
the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Setting a specified minimum distance
There are several ways to deactivate Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
You can set the specified minimum distance for
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
function you can set the minimum distance that
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 176).
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Z
Driving and parking
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is
a malfunction, the transmission may also be
automatically shifted into position P.
175
Driving and parking
176
Driving systems
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Ryou activate Parking Pilot
Rthe vehicle is skidding
A warning tone sounds. The Distance Pilot
Off message will appear in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou activate DSR
Ryou activate the OFFROAD Program+ (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)
The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the assistance graphic when
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 236).
Display in the assistance graphic when
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
Displays in the speedometer
Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the
speedometer
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
one or two segments ; in the stored speed
range light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 236).
You will see the stored speed for approximately
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
X
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering
Pilot
General notes
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
the edge of the road because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will
be too short.
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for
them.
RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
may mistakenly detect vehicles that are
crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to
pull away at the wrong time.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of
the driving lane by means of moderate steering
interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph
(0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
means of camera system : at the top of the
windshield.
In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
the extended automatic Re-start in traffic jams
focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into
account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings
(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in
front if clear lane markings are not present.
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Pilot cannot provide assistance.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in
order for the function to be available.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
laws of physics. It cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
does not detect road and traffic conditions and
does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of
the road, your vehicle could come into contact
Z
177
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving and parking
178
Driving systems
with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists,
that are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or
projecting out into the lane are not detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In
some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In
such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself
to ensure that it does not leave the lane.
The support provided by the system can be
impaired if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if:
Ryou actively change lane
Ryou switch on the turn signal
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
not steer for a prolonged period of time
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Pilot is automatically active once
more.
Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
Ron very sharp corners
Rwhen towing a trailer
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
Observe the important safety notes on Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
The steering interventions are carried out with a
limited steering moment. The system requires
the driver to keep his hands on the steering
wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you with
a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is
then switched to passive. Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC remains active.
Activating Steering Pilot
X
Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
The Steering Pilot On message appears
on the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
activated.
Information in the multifunction display
If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a
steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :
appears in gray. If the system provides you with
support by means of steering interventions,
symbol : is shown in green.
Deactivating Steering Pilot
X
Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
The Steering Pilot Off message appears
on the multifunction display. Steering pilot is
deactivated.
Driving systems
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated
automatically.
179
Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.
Level control (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package)
Important safety notes
Level control adapts the vehicle level automatically to the current operating and driving situation. This results in reduced fuel consumption
and improved handling.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
level is lower; with an increase in temperature,
the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
continues once the door has been closed.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 165).
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
driving characteristics could be impaired by
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on
a bend. There is a risk of an accident.
When you drive with the chassis lowered or
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You
could also exceed the permissible vehicle
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of
an accident.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
G WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
may start to skid and roll over in the event of
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always
wear your seat belts.
Basic settings
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or lowered depends on the basic setting selected.
Select:
Rthe Comfort or Sport drive program for driving on normal roads
Rthe Offroad drive program for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program for off-road
driving
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Driving systems
180
Driving and parking
Roffroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiable
off-road terrain
Roffroad level 2 for driving on normal off-road
terrain
Roffroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle in particularly rough terrain at low speeds only
The individual vehicle levels differ from the normal level as follows:
R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in the Sport drive program
R+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in the Comfort drive program
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in the Offroad drive program
R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in the Offroad Plus drive
program
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in offroad level 1
R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in offroad level 2
R+ 3.5 in (+ 90 mm) in offroad level 3
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear. Once normal level has been reached,
all indicator lamps = go out.
The vehicle automatically selects normal level if
you:
Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for approximately
20 seconds
The vehicle is lowered to low level if you are
traveling at higher speeds.
Normal level
Setting the vehicle level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.
Setting the vehicle to normal level:
X Start the engine.
X Press selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?.
The vehicle is lowered.
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.
Start the engine.
X Press selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
clockwise ;.
The vehicle is raised.
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?.
The vehicle is lowered.
X
During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐
cle Rising message appears in the multifunction display.
Turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?
until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to
flash.
The vehicle is lowered to normal level. As
soon as the next lowest level is reached, the
indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.
Offroad levels
General notes
Only select an offroad level when this is appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption increases and handling may be affected.
Driving systems
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear.
i Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-
sages using the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to offroad level 3 is taking place, you will see a message such as the following in the multifunction
display: Vehicle rising Max. speed
12 mph (20 km/h).
The Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) message
draws your attention to the maximum speed
permitted for offroad level 3.
If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at offroad
level 3, you will see the following message
shown in red in the multifunction display: Low‐
ering Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning. The vehicle is lowered
and offroad level 3 is canceled.
If you continue to increase your speed, the red
message continues to be shown in the multifunction display. The newly set level is not displayed until the vehicle has been set to a level
suitable for the current speed.
Lowering the vehicle
Indicator lamps = for the desired offroad level
flash:
Rthe
lower indicator lamp flashes, offroad
level 1 is selected
Rthe lower and center indicator lamps flash,
offroad level 2 is selected
Rall three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3
is selected
The vehicle adjusts to the offroad level selected.
As soon as an offroad level is reached, the corresponding indicator lamp stops flashing and
lights up constantly.
Raising the vehicle
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
clockwise ;.
The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by 1.2 in
(30 mm) compared to the normal level.
During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising
message, for example, appears in the multifunction display.
If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) while
the vehicle level is being lowered, you will see
the following message shown in white in the
multifunction display: Lowering Max. speed
20 km/h.
The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.
You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering.
Offroad level 2 is canceled and the vehicle is
lowered to offroad level 1 if you:
Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds
Offroad level 1 is canceled. Depending on the
vehicle's speed and the selected drive program,
the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal
level or low level if you:
Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds
Z
Driving and parking
You can select from the following:
ROffroad level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph
(96 km/h)
ROffroad level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph
(64 km/h)
ROffroad level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph
(20 km/h)
If you select an offroad level when driving at too
high a speed, the Drive More Slowly message
appears in the multifunction display.
Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving on
extremely difficult off-road terrain under particularly rough conditions.
RAdjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
181
182
Driving systems
HOLD function
Driving and parking
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
fastened
Rthe electric parking brake is released
Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
function, the vehicle may roll away in the following situations when you leave the vehicle:
Rif
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply
Rif the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
Rif the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with or the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
secure the vehicle against rolling away before
you leave it.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 182).
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
X
i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
Ryou depress the accelerator and the transmission is in position h or k
Ryou shift the transmission to position j
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears
from the multifunction display
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake
Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
Driving systems
AIRMATIC package
General notes
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort.
Level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a
laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is
lowered automatically to improve driving safety
and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also
the option to manually adjust the vehicle level.
AIRMATIC consists of:
Rlevel settings
Rlevel control and
RADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System)
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): your vehicle may also be equipped with
the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 184).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equipped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
(Y page 184).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 220).
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller (Y page 142) or the level button (Y page 185). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
continues once the door has been closed.
ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
System)
General notes
The Adaptive Damping System automatically
controls the calibration of the dampers. The
damping characteristics adapt to the current
operating and driving situation.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface conditions
Rthe drive program selected
Rthe vehicle level setting
Selecting Comfort mode
Z
Driving and parking
When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is automatically shifted to position j
if:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs
Rthe power supply is insufficient
On steep uphill or downhill gradients or if there
is a malfunction, the transmission may also be
automatically shifted to position j.
183
Driving and parking
184
Driving systems
In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
more comfortable driving style. Also select the
Comfort drive program when driving fast on
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
X Select the Comfort drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
The vehicle is adjusted to normal level
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle
is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you:
mph (112 km/h) or
at speeds between 60 mph (96 km/h)
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds
The vehicle is raised again if you:
Rdrive at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive
program, the vehicle is:
Rlowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive at
speeds above 112 mph (180 km/h)
Rraised again if you drive at speeds below
87 mph (140 km/h)
X
Select the Sport drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm)
compared to the normal level.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle
remains at the normal level.
Selecting Sport Plus tuning (MercedesAMG vehicles)
Rdrive at speeds above 70
Rdrive
Selecting Sport mode
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
the Sport Plus drive program ensures the best
possible contact with the road. Select this drive
program when employing a sporty driving style,
e.g. on winding country roads or primarily when
driving on race circuits.
DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive program. For further information on DSR, see
(Y page 213).
X Select the Sport Plus drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport drive program ensures even better
contact with the road. Select this drive program
when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
winding country roads.
DSR is not available in the Sport drive program.
For further information on DSR, see
(Y page 213).
The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort and vehicle dynamics. Depending on the drive program
selected (Y page 146), the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM also changes the setting.
If you have selected the Comfort drive program:
Rrolling
movement is reduced in the event of
changing surface undulations
Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced
Rthe driving is dynamic
If you have selected the Sport drive program:
Rthe
Rthe
roll angle is reduced significantly
driving is even more dynamic
Driving systems
Rthe
roll angle is reduced even more significantly
Rthe driving is designed for maximum dynamism
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
driving characteristics could be impaired by
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on
a bend. There is a risk of an accident.
Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.
G WARNING
When you drive with the chassis lowered or
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You
could also exceed the permissible vehicle
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of
an accident.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
G WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
may start to skid and roll over in the event of
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always
wear your seat belts.
General notes
Only select raised level if this is appropriate for
the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption may increase and handling may be affected.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
level is lower; with an increase in temperature,
the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
continues once the door has been closed.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a
speed of 40 mph (64 km/h) you can choose
between the normal and raised vehicle level.
Select the normal vehicle level for normal road
surfaces and the raised vehicle level for driving
with snow chains or on particularly poor road
surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
If you try to select raised level at a speed above
40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More Slowly
message appears in the multifunction display.
Z
Driving and parking
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected
the Sport Plus drive program:
185
Driving systems
186
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed
of 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose between
the normal and raised vehicle level.
Driving and parking
Setting the raised vehicle level
RMercedes-AMG
vehicles: You drive for
approximately 20 seconds between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h).
RYou drive with a trailer at speeds greater than
19 mph (30 km/h).
The raised vehicle level remains saved when you
are not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal vehicle level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
being raised, and lights up continuously as
soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the vehicle is raised by 2.4 in (60 mm)
compared to the normal level.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is
raised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the normal level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in the
multifunction display.
The message remains until the raised level is
reached.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear.
The raised vehicle level setting is canceled in the
following cases:
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): you are driving faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you are driving
faster than 43 mph (70 km/h).
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): You drive for approximately 20 seconds
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
being lowered, and goes out as soon as the
desired vehicle level is reached.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the selected
drive program (Y page 142).
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle
is adjusted to normal level regardless of the
drive program selected (Y page 142). The
vehicle remains at the normal level, even if the
drive program is changed.
During the adjustment, the Lowering message appears in the multifunction display.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will
disappear.
X
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
General notes
i The AMG adaptive sport suspension system
is available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles and
for the Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC.
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
Driving systems
Sport mode
In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by
10 mm compared to the normal level.
Comfort mode
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight
roads, e.g. highways.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps ; and = go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
Sport mode ensures even better contact with
the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamp = lights up.
You have selected Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps ; and = are off:
X
Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamp ; lights up.
You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. When maneuvering,
parking or pulling out of a parking space, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Z
Driving and parking
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or
Comfort
The suspension setting can be adjusted using
button : in the center console or the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller (Y page 142).
Each time you start the engine with the ignition
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort
mode is activated. For further information about
starting the engine, see (Y page 136).
187
188
Driving systems
Driving and parking
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures
the minimum detection range to an obstacle
from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for
the rear area when you establish an electrical
connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Range
Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, such as overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps
:
;
=
?
Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)
Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)
Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)
Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)
Minimum distance
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damage them (Y page 330).
Center
Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners
Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
Deactivating or activating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi- Warning display
tion
D
Front area activated
: Indicator lamp
; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is
then also deactivated.
i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
activated
rolling backwards
P
No areas activated
Z
189
Driving and parking
Driving systems
190
Driving systems
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactithe Parking Assist
vated.
PARKTRONIC warning
X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also
qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five seconds.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 330).
X Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Parking Pilot
General notes
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during
parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also
available (Y page 187).
Important safety notes
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or
objects are in the path of your vehicle.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
G WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
parking procedure.
! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which
are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly.
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the parking procedure (Y page 187).
RYou can intervene to correct the steering procedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
canceled.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot.
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
mounted.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into
account when the parking/exiting procedure is
calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections
or loading ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may
therefore guide you into the parking space too
early.
G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
RParking
Pilot may steer in too early
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Further information about the detection range
(Y page 188).
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
if:
Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
Ryou park forwards
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the
direction of travel if:
Rthe parking space is on a curb
Rthe system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
: Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
driving forward. The system is operational up to
a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
While in operation, the system independently
locates and measures parking spaces on both
sides of the vehicle.
Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces
which are:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than
your vehicle
Z
191
Driving and parking
Driving systems
192
Driving systems
Driving and parking
i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot
measure the depth of parking spaces if they
are at right angles to the direction of travel.
You will need to judge whether your vehicle
will fit into the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When
a parking space has been detected, an arrow
towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot only displays parking spaces on the
front-passenger side as standard. Parking
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
this must remain activated until you confirm the
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system
automatically determines whether the parking
space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft
(15 m) away from it.
Parking
G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
away if:
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the
instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
X
The Parking Pilot Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position D while the
vehicle is stationary.
Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.
The Parking Pilot Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Parking Pilot Finished message
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle
is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary
without the driver having to depress the brake
Driving systems
Exiting a parking space
In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:
Rthe border of the parking space must be high
enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too
small, for example.
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered
into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
starting position in the parking space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle
parallel to the direction of travel using the Parking Pilot.
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
You are responsible for braking in good time.
X Start the engine.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X To exit a parking space using Parking
Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
required or according to the message while
the vehicle is stationary.
Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
roundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to
steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
take over the steering before the vehicle has
exited the parking space completely. This is
useful, for example when you recognize that it is
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
X
Z
Driving and parking
pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you
depress the accelerator pedal.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and
brake again yourself. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is still available.
Parking tips:
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in front and
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you
too far into a parking space, or not far enough
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you
across or onto the curb. Cancel the parking
procedure with Parking Pilot if necessary.
RYou can also select preselect transmission
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not
drive as far into the parking space. Should the
transmission change take place too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.
193
Driving systems
194
Canceling Parking Pilot
X
Driving and parking
or
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears
in the multifunction display.
Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button
(Y page 189).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when:
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
Rtransmission position P is selected
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the
Parking Pilot Canceled message.
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer
and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
X
Rear view camera
General notes
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting. The
following are examples of rear view camera
displays in the multimedia system.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rif there is heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 330)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
For technical reasons, leaving the standard
height can result in inaccuracies in the guide
lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chassis.
i The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
Driving systems
Ryou
switch off the engine
open the cargo compartment
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 330).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Ryou
Rthe
rear section of an HGV
slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline.
Ra
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.
X
To switch the function mode for vehicles
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller,
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a
trailer".
The symbol of the selected function is highlighted.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.
X
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Displays in the multimedia system
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position k.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Z
Driving and parking
The flap closes again when:
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process
195
196
Driving systems
Driving and parking
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
: Front warning display
; Additional measurement operational readi-
ness indicator for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 188), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system.
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 195).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with steering input
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
: White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 195).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :.
X Maintain the steering input and reverse carefully.
Driving systems
X
197
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
Driving and parking
"Coupling up a trailer" function
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
: White guide line for current steering input
; Parking space marking
X
This function is only available on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.30 m from the ball coupling
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without steering input
= End of parking space
; Trailer drawbar marker assistant
= Trailer drawbar
? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-
tion
A Ball coupling
Z
198
Driving systems
Driving and parking
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of
the trailer tow hitch in the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not at
all.
X Select symbol ? using the controller.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X Back up carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid ; points approximately
in the direction of trailer drawbar =.
X Back up carefully until trailer drawbar = reaches the red guide line.
The distance between the trailer drawbar and
the red guide line is now approximately
0.30 m.
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 220).
180° view
: Symbol for the 180° view function
; Your vehicle
= Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
You can also use the rear view camera to select
a 180° view.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 188), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays
are active, warning displays = light up in the
multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
cameras.
The system processes images from the following cameras:
RRear view camera
RFront camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, for
instance when parking or at exits with reduced
visibility.
You can show pictures from the 360° camera in
full-screen mode or in seven different splitscreen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of
the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
RTop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle)
RTop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
RTop view and enlarged rear view
RTop view and enlarged front view
RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
tow hitch)
RTop view and rear-view images from the exterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
RTop view and forward-view images from the
exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from h or k to i, the dynamic
guide lines are hidden.
When you shift between transmission positions
h and k, you see the previously selected front
or rear view.
Distances measured by Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is away from an object:
Driving systems
PARKTRONIC is active
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
present in close range of the vehicle
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate
close range of the vehicle
i The camera in the rear area is protected
from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
When the camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again in the following situations:
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process
Ryou switch the engine off
Ryou open the cargo compartment
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 330).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the camera has been deactivated.
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering
area while maneuvering and parking in parking
spaces.
You are always responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your immediate
surroundings when parking and maneuvering.
This applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner in the following situations:
Rthe doors are open
Rthe exterior mirrors are folded in
Rthe tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rthe cameras are exposed to very bright light
Rthe area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
such as when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rthe
camera lenses are dirty or covered
Rthe vehicle components in which the cameras
are installed are damaged In this event, have
the camera position and setting checked at a
qualified specialist workshop
Do not use the 360° camera under such circumstances. You can otherwise injure others or
cause damage to objects or the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In
trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
level of the trailer coupling.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving the
standard height can result in:
Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
images (top view)
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed in the
following situations:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
Rthe SmartKey is in key position 2 in the ignition lock
Rthe multimedia system is switched on
Switching on the 360° camera
X
or
Press the Ø button in the center console
for longer than two seconds.
Depending on whether transmission position
h or k is selected, the following appears:
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
Press the Ø button in the center console.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Depending on whether transmission position
h or k is selected, the following appears:
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
X
Z
Driving and parking
Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist
199
Driving systems
200
Driving and parking
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected on the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
from the rear view camera.
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
Selecting the split-screens or 180° view
Selecting split-screen view
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
the controller.
X
To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the controller to select 180° View and press 7 to
confirm.
i The 180° View option is only available in the
following views:
RTop view with picture from the rear view
camera
RTop view with picture from the front camera
Displays in the multimedia system
Important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx;
=
?
A
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image
Guide lines for the maximum steering input
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving systems
201
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
D Bumper
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position k.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front camera
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance
to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the camera in
the exterior mirrors
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
: Symbol for setting the top view with image
from the forward camera in the exterior mirrors
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
Z
Driving and parking
Top view and enlarged rear view
202
Driving systems
i You can also select the camera setting in the
exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.
Driving and parking
Top view with trailer view
Exiting 360° camera display mode
The 360° camera display is stopped:
Rwhen you select transmission position j, or
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears in the multimedia
system. You can also switch the display by
selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing the controller to confirm.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
Symbol for the trailer view setting
Trailer drawbar marker assistant
Ball coupling
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.30 m from the ball coupling
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer
coupling.
:
;
=
?
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of
the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible in
the multimedia system display.
180° view
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
; Your vehicle
= Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
i 180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
The attention level evaluation is deleted and
restarts when the journey is continued, if:
Ryou switch off the engine
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
take a break
Displaying the attention level
is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned
earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display when the
engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 236) of
the on-board computer.
X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION
ASSIST using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
The following information is displayed:
Rthe length of the journey since the last break.
Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels
from high to low.
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph
(200 km/h).
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a
Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take
a break, you will be warned again after
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued
in the multifunction display, a service station
search is performed in COMAND. You can select
a service station and navigation to this service
station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND.
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 237).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selected:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.
The attention level detected by Attention Assist
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The data stored in the navigation system and
general traffic regulations are used to determine
the current speed limit.
As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected.
X
Z
203
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving systems
Driving and parking
204
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
passed, the display of the speed limits is updated.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
RThe regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the
instrument cluster either.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
: Maximum permitted speed
; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
assistance graphic display (Y page 236).
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired
or temporarily unavailable if the information in
the digital street map of the navigation system is
incorrect or out of date.
Instrument cluster display
Displaying the assistance graphic
Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
X
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 204) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 206).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will
also receive an optical and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Driving systems
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Rthe
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the
vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your
vehicle, as shown in the picture.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles driving at the inner
edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such as
trucks.
Monitoring area
Warning lamp
Radar sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
Z
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
205
Driving systems
206
Driving and parking
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The warning lamp lights up yellow in the
exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist
Not Available When Towing a Trailer
See Operator's Manual message appears in
the multifunction display.
i You can deactivate the warning lamps in the
: Warning lamp
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :
in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds
of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp goes out
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist
is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (Y page 237).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
X
exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock
Rthe engine is not running
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted
at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
detects lane markings on the road and can warn
you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
X
G WARNING
Standard
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
in green (Y page 236). Lane Keeping Assist is
ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
Ryou brake hard
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
To ensure that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane
markings, the system detects certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Z
207
Driving and parking
Driving systems
208
Driving systems
Driving Assistance Plus package
General notes
Driving and parking
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171), Active
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 208) and Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 210).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on
either side of the vehicle that are not directly
visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing
radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the
exterior mirrors and draws your attention to
vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you
then switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and
audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help
you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging loads. Following an accident or
in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the
function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Driving systems
209
: Warning lamp
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ;
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
reliably indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of
your lane.
On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane
may not be shown if they are too far away.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp
goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range at speeds above approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning lamp always
lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
Assist is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
warning. You then hear a double warning tone
and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
no further warning tones.
Z
Driving and parking
Warning lamp
210
Driving systems
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a double warning tone sounds. In addition, a display underlining the danger of a side
collision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at
any time by countersteering slightly or accelerating.
The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe offroad program is activated (vehicles
without the Offroad Engineering package).
Rthe Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).
Rthe
LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated
(vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package).
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 237) is activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
X
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the
exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot
Asst. Not Available When Towing a
Trailer See Operator's Manual message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
different areas to the front, rear and side of your
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
Driving systems
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane
Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
keep your vehicle in its lane.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway
Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and
warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
brake application, e.g. after intentionally drivZ
Driving and parking
lane-correcting application of the brakes can
bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in a speed range
between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
211
212
Driving systems
Driving and parking
ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of
an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle
back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction display.
A lane-correcting brake application can be made
after driving over a solid or broken lane marking.
Before this, a warning must be given by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In
addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides
must have been detected.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can
have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.
i A further lane-correcting brake application
can only occur after your vehicle has returned
to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
Ryou have switched on the turn signal
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
Ryou
have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
RESP® is switched off
Rthe transmission is not in position h
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established
Rthe Off-road program is activated (vehicles
without the Off-Road Engineering package)
Rthe Off-road or Off-road Plus drive program is
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may
be interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
Rswitch on the turn signal
Rclearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
Rlane markings are no longer detected
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
in green (Y page 236). Active Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®
Driving systems
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. Lane-correcting brake application does
not take place when towing a trailer. Active Lane
Keeping Assist is not activated and the lines in
the assistance graphic are gray.
Off-road driving systems
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, it
improves the traction of your vehicle whenever
a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
This may damage the transfer case. Damage
of this sort is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised.
Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.
! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
Before you operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
workshop. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
if necessary.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 165).
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
General notes
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
selected on the on-board computer. The steeper
the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat
stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is activated and the transmission is in position D, R or
N. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed
than that set on the on-board computer at any
time by accelerating or braking.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
and you activate DSR on a slippery road surface, the wheels may lose traction. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Before switching DSR on, please take into
consideration the road surface and the difference between driving speed and the set
speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of
road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
You are always responsible for keeping control
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not
always be able to keep to the set speed, depending on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
Z
Driving and parking
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
Ryou brake hard
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
213
Driving systems
Driving and parking
214
Activating DSR
Changing the set speed
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.
You can only activate DSR when driving at
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ã
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display
with the Max. speed 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h).
If you have activated DSR and you change the
drive program, DSR is deactivated. If you switch
between the offroad and offroad plus drive programs, DSR remains activated.
X
X
Deactivating DSR
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the Off message.
On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package, if you select a different drive program, DSR
is also deactivated. If you switch between the
Offroad programs, DSR remains activated.
DSR switches off automatically if you drive
faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The
à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction
display with the Off message. The status indicator in the multifunction display goes out. You
also hear a warning. On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package, if you select a different onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deactivated.
X
To increase or reduce the set speed in
1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h
increments): briefly press the cruise control
lever up : for a higher set speed or down ;
for a lower set speed.
The set speed appears in the multifunction
display with the à DSR symbol.
When DSR is activated, you can change the set
speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph
(Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).
i The DSR set speed is always changed in
1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h increments). This is regardless of whether you
press the cruise control lever to or beyond the
pressure point.
Offroad program (vehicles without the
Offroad Engineering package)
General notes
Select the Offroad program for easily negotiable off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
programs especially adapted to off-road driving
are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
be depressed much further in order to accelerate.
You can select the Offroad drive program at
speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds of more than 60 mph
(96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive program, the Drive More Slowly message
Driving systems
Selecting the Offroad program
Selecting the Offroad program
X To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up.
The Drive Program "Offroad1" Max.
Speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display.
The vehicle is raised by +2.4 in (60 mm).
The vehicle is lowered to normal level again if
you:
Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rdrive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph
(80 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately
20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive program to the Comfort drive program if you drive
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).
The Drive More Slowly message appears in
the multifunction display.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 165).
Offroad programs (vehicles with Offroad Engineering package)
General notes
The Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs
assist you when driving off-road. The engine's
performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP®
and 4ETS programs especially adapted to offroad driving are activated. An accelerator pedal
curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the
accelerator pedal must be depressed further to
accelerate.
Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive
programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy,
or if you have installed your vehicle with snow
chains.
Offroad drive program
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller
; Offroad program indicator lamp
Select the Offroad program for easily negotiable off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
programs especially adapted to off-road driving
are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
be depressed much further in order to accelerate.
You can select the Offroad drive program at
speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
Program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h)
and select the Offroad drive program, the
Drive More Slowly message appears in the
Z
Driving and parking
appears in the multifunction display. The last
active drive program is selected again.
Do not use the Offroad program on roads that
are snow-covered or icy or if you have installed
your vehicle with snow chains.
215
Driving systems
216
multifunction display. The last active drive program is selected again.
Selecting the Offroad program
To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up.
The Drive program "Offroad" Max.
speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display.
The vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm).
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive program to the Comfort drive program if you drive
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).
The Drive more slowly message appears in
the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
X
Offroad Plus drive program
RThe
Offroad Plus program is selected and
the vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm)
compared with the Offroad drive program.
RDSR is switched on.
RThe differential lock is closed.
You can select the Offroad Plus drive program at
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Offroad Plus drive program automatically
switches to the Offroad drive program if you
drive faster than 30 mph (45 km/h). The Drive
more slowly message appears in the multifunction display.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 165).
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles
with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
traction:
Rif
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller
; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp
Select the Offroad Plus drive program for rough
terrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain or
for driving on rocky terrain.
Your vehicle has an automatically activated differential lock for the transfer case. It controls
the balance between the front and rear axles.
The differential lock improves the vehicle's traction. 4ETS (Y page 70) controls the balance
between both wheels on an axle.
Selecting the Offroad Plus drive program
X
To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up.
The Drive program "Offroad Plus"
Max. speed 25 mph message appears in the
multifunction display.
you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal when driving
Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking
If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no
longer be steered. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear
when driving on slippery road surfaces.
G WARNING
If you do not wait for the transfer case gear
change process to complete, the transfer
case could remain in the neutral position. The
power transmission to the driven wheels is
then interrupted. There is a danger of the
vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a
risk of an accident.
Wait until the transfer case shift process is
completed.
Do not turn off the engine while changing gear
and do not shift the automatic transmission to
another position.
Driving systems
General notes
217
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE
: LOW RANGE offroad gear button
; LOW RANGE offroad gear indicator lamp
HIGH RANGE
Position for all normal onroad driving conditions
LOW RANGE
Offroad position for driving
off-road and fording
The transmission ratio
between the engine and
wheels is only approximately one third of that in
the HIGH RANGE road position. Drive torque is thus
proportionately higher.
Do not use LOW RANGE:
Ron slippery road surfaces,
e.g. in the case of slush
Ron snow or ice-covered
roads
Rif you have mounted snow
chains to your vehicle
The LOW RANGE offroad gear assists you in
driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted
for this purpose.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 165). You will find information about
driving safety systems in conjunction with
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 66).
RANGE if:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indicator
lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator
appears in the multifunction display and in the
status indicator.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
SPORT drive program is activated. The LOW
RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport"
message then appears in the multifunction
display.
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below 70 km/h
X
Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indicator
lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off message appears
and the status indicator goes out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
Z
Driving and parking
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
218
Driving systems
Messages in the multifunction display
Driving and parking
If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the
multifunction display:
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
LOW RANGE Max.
Speed 24 mph
You have been driving faster than 24 mph (40 km/h). Additionally, the
indicator lamp on the button in the center console is flashing.
X Slow down to change gear.
LOW RANGE Shift to
Position N Briefly
The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.
LOW RANGE Shifting
Canceled Please
Reactivate
LOW RANGE Stop
Apply Parking Brake
The gear change process was not carried out.
Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out the
gear change process again.
X
A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels.
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-
cle's drive train.
Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions
when doing this.
X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 157).
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.
X
Driving dynamics display in the
COMAND display (vehicles with the OffRoad Engineering package)
General notes
The driving dynamics display allows you to see
the selected drive program and additional information about the vehicle's operating status in
the COMAND display.
: Drive program selected
; Status of the differential lock for the transfer
=
?
A
B
C
D
case
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
Brake pedal position shown in %
Condition of the LOW RANGE offroad gear
Angle of inclination
Steering angle
Uphill or downhill gradient in percentage
Towing a trailer
Activating the driving dynamics display
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
G WARNING
Switch on COMAND (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
COMAND display.
X
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
ball coupling in question is longer or angled
differently. This could seriously impair the
driving characteristics and the trailer can
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
You should only ever install a ball coupling
that has the permissible dimensions and that
is designed to meet your trailer-towing
requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
or the trailer tow hitch.
You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and
those for the towing vehicle under "Technical
data" (Y page 394).
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
not secured with the bolt provided and the
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
brake as necessary.
Please observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the trailer coupling if a detachable trailer coupling is used.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle
correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
exceeded:
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
Rthe permissible trailer load
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
trailer
The applicable permissible values, which must
not be exceeded, can be found:
Rin the vehicle documents
Ron the identification plates for the trailer tow
hitch and the trailer
Ron the vehicle identification plate
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
Ris heavier
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradientclimbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
Z
Driving and parking
E Level control
F Compass with angle scale
219
220
Towing a trailer
Ris
affected more by strong crosswinds
more sensitive steering
Rhas a larger turning circle
This could impair the handling characteristics.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed
to the current road and weather conditions. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle/trailer combination.
Driving and parking
Rdemands
Notes on towing a trailer
General notes
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the cooling system and drive train
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle
type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chassis
frame.
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations
in the relevant country.
This lowers the risk of an accident.
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
your vehicle.
More information on availability and installation can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
for installing detachable trailer couplings.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other
detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers
of your vehicle.
RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,
remove it from the ball coupling recess. This
will reduce the risk of damage to the ball coupling.
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on
the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the maximum load. You will find the values in the tire
pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle
(Y page 369).
Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability
or are not available at all:
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 187)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 204)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210)
On vehicles without level control, the height of
the ball coupling will alter according to the load
placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
with a height-adjustable drawbar.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
Driving tips
Also observe the notes on pulling away with a
trailer (Y page 138).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
trailer's documents to see what the maximum
permissible speed is for your trailer. Observe the
legally permissible maximum speed in the relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased
when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to
find out whether this applies to your vehicle
(Y page 394). If you utilize any of the added
maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed
a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for
reasons concerning the operating permit. This
also applies in countries in which the maximum
permissible speed for car/trailer combinations
is greater than 60 mph (100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients.
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. If you need additional
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly
rather than continuously.
Driving tips
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X Do not accelerate.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Brake if necessary.
Towing a trailer
RMaintain
Installing the ball coupling
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
and secured, it can come loose during the
journey and endanger other road users. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
Pull protective cap : in the direction of the
arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
X Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be
thrown around.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 295).
X
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
not secured with the bolt provided and the
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is
installed and secured correctly before every
journey.
X
Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball
coupling recess ; in the direction of the
arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are in
line with the holes in ball coupling recess ?.
Z
Driving and parking
a greater distance from the vehicle
in front than when driving without a trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
When driving in mountainous areas, note that
the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude.
221
Towing a trailer
222
Coupling up a trailer
Driving and parking
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if
X
Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball coupling
recess and the ball coupling to the stop.
X
Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.
featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the
towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result
in a loss of function of the brake systems of
both the vehicle and the trailer.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: select
normal level and the Comfort drive program.
X Switch off the engine.
X Close the doors and tailgate.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is working.
X Push the combination switch upwards/downwards and check whether the corresponding
turn signal on the trailer flashes.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only
when the electrical connection is established
correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems also
depends on this, for example:
RESP®
RParking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Pilot
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RParking
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if you
X
Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotter
for correct installation.
If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted,
remove the ball coupling. Under these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for
trailer towing.
Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains
at normal level. When coupling up a trailer,
please observe the following:
RIf the normal level has not been set manually, the vehicle is automatically lowered
to normal level. This is the case if a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.
RThe Sport drive program is not available.
These restrictions apply to all accessories
powered through a connection to the trailer
power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle
carrier.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces
require by law:
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle and
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to
the bumper or the axle.
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight
cornering possible.
RA separate brake system for certain types of
trailer.
RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check the
specific legal requirements applicable to your
state.
If the trailer becomes detached from the towing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the
trailer brakes.
Towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer combination complies with the local regulations:
Rin your place of residence
Rin the location to which you are driving
The police and local authorities can provide reliable information.
Observe the following when towing a trailer:
RTo gain driving experience and to become
accustomed to the new handling characteristics, you should practice the following in a
traffic-free location:
- cornering
- stopping
- backing up
RBefore driving, check:
- trailer tow hitch
- safety switch for braked trailers
- safety chains
- electrical connections
- lights
- wheels
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
unobstructed view of the rear section of the
trailer.
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually
using the brake controller and check whether
the brakes function correctly.
RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent
the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in
motion.
RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at regular
intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the
trailer is equipped with trailer lights and
brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these
are working.
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
stable when towing a trailer than when driving
without one. Avoid sudden steering movements.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
gradient climbing capability and a longer
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
requires more careful steering.
RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but instead
depress the brake pedal moderately at first so
that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then
increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk
of engine failure.
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear to
utilize the engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if installed, the trailer brakes.
RIf the coolant temperature increases dramatically while the air-conditioning system is
switched on, switch off the air-conditioning
system.
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by opening the windows and switching the ventilation
blower and the interior temperature to the
highest level.
RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to
the extended length of your vehicle/trailer
combination.
Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combination, you require additional road space in
relation to the vehicle you are overtaking
before you can change back to the original
lane.
Z
223
Driving and parking
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
224
Decoupling a trailer
Driving and parking
G WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
There is a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
is engaged.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you disconnect the trailer cable. This could result in your
limbs or those of other people that are
between the vehicle body and tires or underneath the vehicle being trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
Permissible noseweight
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
Loading a trailer
RWhen
loading the trailer, make sure that neither the permissible gross weight of the trailer
nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.
The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible values
on the type plates of your vehicle and the
trailer. When calculating how much weight
the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay attention to the respective lowest values.
RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.
The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load
where the trailer drawbar noseweight
accounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's permissible gross weight.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X Close the doors and tailgate.
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.
Detach the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
X Switch off the engine.
X
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar
loads
Weight specifications
Maximum allowable gross mass
The gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the
weight of the load and equipment on the trailer.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
i The weight of additional accessories, pas-
sengers, and cargo reduces the permissible
trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
RTo
check that the weights of the towing vehicle and the trailer comply with the maximum
permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer
combination (including the driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer)
weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.
RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the front
and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer
and the trailer drawbar noseweight.
Removing the ball coupling
Remove the spring cotter.
Remove the bolt from the ball coupling
recess.
X Remove the ball coupling from the ball coupling recess.
X
X
Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be
thrown around.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 295).
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
tow hitch (Y page 331).
X
X
Trailer power supply
! Accessories with a maximum power con-
sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the
power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at
the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 4.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide
more information about installing the trailer
electrics.
Bicycle rack
General notes
Trailer tow hitch (example with additional
guide pin)
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, you can
transport up to four bicycles on it:
RWhen attached by clamping onto ball coupling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. You
can transport up to three bicycles.
RWhen attached to ball coupling : and also
guide pin ;, the maximum payload is 100 kg.
You can transport up to three bicycles.
The payload is calculated from the weight of the
bicycle rack and the load of the bicycle rack.
To transport bicycles with a gross weight
between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle
racks with additional anchorage on guide pin ;.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle if
you
Rexceed
the permissible payload of the
trailer tow hitch
Ruse the bicycle rack incorrectly
Rattach the bicycle rack to the ball coupling
beneath the ball head
There is a risk of an accident.
For your safety and that of other road users,
observe the following:
RAlways
observe the permissible payload of
the trailer tow hitch.
RUse the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.
RAlways attach the bicycle rack correctly by
clamping onto the ball head and, if possible,
to the guide pin on the ball coupling as well.
RTo transport four bicycles, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the ball
coupling's guide pin.
RUse only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
RAlways comply with the bicycle rack's operating manual.
! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using
them incorrectly can cause damage to and
fractures in the trailer tow hitch.
Z
225
Driving and parking
Bicycle rack
Driving and parking
226
Bicycle rack
Use only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving characteristics to change. The vehicle:
Ris heavier
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradientclimbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
This could impair the handling characteristics.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a
safe distance and drive carefully.
When using bicycle racks, set the tire pressure
on the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximum
load. Further information on tire pressure can be
found on the tire pressure table (Y page 354).
Loading instructions
The greater the distance between the load's center of gravity and the ball head, the higher the load
exerted on the trailer tow hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RAttach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
RAlways distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longitudinal axis.
Before loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from the
bicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerodynamic resistance and the bicycle rack's center of gravity.
Always secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear visibility.
The aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitch
as a result.
Load distribution on the bicycle rack
: Distance in height between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
; Distance to the rear between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
= The center of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicle
Bicycle rack
227
When loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:
Number of bicycles
Gross weight of bicycle rack and load
Max. distance :
Max. distance ;
3
up to 75 kg
420 mm
300 mm
420 mm
400 mm
up to 100
kg2
Driving and parking
42
2
When transporting four bicycles or a gross weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks with
additional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.
Z
228
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 37).
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not recognize dangers.
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 37).
X
Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
If you turn the light switch to Ã, T or
L, the brightness is dependent upon the
brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 169):
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the maximum speed.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
(Y page 171):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front moving more slowly than the stored
speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 230).
Displays and operation
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
On-board computer and displays
There is a short delay before a change in outside
temperature appears in the multifunction display.
Coolant temperature gauge
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID: the
coolant temperature display is on the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 37).
Under normal operating conditions and with the
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature
may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
229
: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Left control panel
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system:
you can find further information on the Voice
Control System in the separate operating
instructions.
Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system:
you can find further information on voice-operated control for navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
X
Z
230
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls
9
:
Press briefly:
Right control panel
~
RRejects
in lists
a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or the previous or next audio track
or video scene
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone number
6
RMakes
W
X
RAdjusts
8
RMute
?
RSwitches
9
:
Press and hold:
Multifunction display
a
RConfirms
%
Press briefly:
up the menu and menu bar
RScrolls
RSelects
or ends a call
the telephone book/redial
memory
RExits
or accepts a call
to the redial memory
RSwitches
the volume
on voice-operated control for navigation or the Voice
Control System
RIn
the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the
desired frequency range or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
the selection or display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected number
RBack
RSwitches
off voice-operated control for navigation or the Voice
Control System
RHides display messages or calls up
the last Trip menu function used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
%
: Permanent display: outside temperature or
Press and hold:
;
=
?
A
B
RCalls up the standard display in the
X
Trip menu
speed (Y page 238)
Time
Text field
Menu bar
Drive program (Y page 145)
Transmission position (Y page 145)
To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press any other button, menu
bar ? fades out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.
Menus and submenus
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Possible displays in the multifunction display:
Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 147)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 190)
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 169)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 114)
Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 139)
Rë HOLD function (Y page 182)
Ra Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot
(Y page 236)
RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation
(Y page 213)
Trip menu
Standard display
RZ
X
Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 229).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip
menu (Y page 231)
instructions)
RNavi menu (navigation
(Y page 232)
RAudio
menu (Y page 234)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 235)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 236)
RServ. menu (Y page 237)
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 238)
RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 240)
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 240)
:
;
=
?
Distance
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
From start or From reset.
X
The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the
values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset
(Y page 232).
The From Start trip computer is automatically
reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From reset trip computer is automatically
reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles.
Z
On-board computer and displays
i Set the time using the multimedia system;
231
Menus and submenus
232
On-board computer and displays
ECO display
The ECO display is not available for MercedesAMG vehicles.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 160).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Press a to confirm your selection.
Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following functions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
also reset.
X
X
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu displays
only the approximate range :.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
Digital speedometer
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
A gear shift recommendation Z can also
appear.
Observe the information on gearshift recommendation Z when shifting manually
(Y page 147).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.
X
Resetting values
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation in
the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia
system.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
: Direction of travel
; Current road
Menus and submenus
No change of direction announced
= Lanes not recommended
? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol
:
;
=
?
Distance to destination
Distance to the next change of direction
Current road
"Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
On multilane roads, lane recommendations can
be displayed for the next change of direction if
the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the navigation system
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change of
direction. The change of direction starts once
the distance display reaches zero.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
RNew
Route... or Calculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
RRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land.
RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
RO
You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
Z
On-board computer and displays
Route guidance active
233
Menus and submenus
234
Audio menu
On-board computer and displays
Selecting a radio station
: Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position
The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset
position is only displayed along with station ; if
this has been stored. You can store TV channels ; in the multimedia system.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select
radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
frequency range is shown in the multifunction
display.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
X
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select
CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
button until desired track : has been
reached.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio device
or medium, the multifunction display will show
the number and title of the track. The current
track does not appear in audio AUX mode
(Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source
connected).
Video DVD operation
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
Switch on the multimedia system and select
video DVD (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
been reached.
X
Menus and submenus
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone
READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
the menu selected.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call even if you are not in
the Tel menu.
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry from the phone book
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to
start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X To exit the telephone book: press the ~
or % button.
X
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
Z
On-board computer and displays
Telephone menu
235
Menus and submenus
236
X
or
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
To exit the redial memory: press the ~
or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist menu:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 236)
RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign
Assist display (Y page 236)
RActivating or deactivating Steering Pilot
(Y page 236)
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
(Y page 237)
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function (Y page 237)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 237)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 237)
Displaying the assistance graphic
RTraffic
Sign Assist (Y page 203)
Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67)
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 73)
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 202)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 206) or Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210)
RDSR (Y page 213)
ROff-road program (vehicles with Off-Road
Engineering package) (Y page 215)
RRear window wiper (Y page 118)
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
assessment.
RDistance
Traffic Sign Assist
You can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message
function on or off in the Traffic Sign Assist
menu. When the function is activated, detected
traffic signs and information appear in the multifunction display for five seconds.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Traffic Sign Assist.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate the message function: press the a button again.
For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,
see (Y page 203).
Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Steering
Pilot.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
When the Steering Pilot is activated, the multifunction display displays a Steering Pilot
On message.
Further information about Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot (Y page 177).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance
Graphic.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The multifunction display shows the Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:
X
Menus and submenus
You can use these functions to activate/deactivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with
the Driving Assistance package, to activate or
deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67) and Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function (Y page 72).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention Assist.
X Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Sensitive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 202).
X
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
see (Y page 204).
For further information about Active Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 208).
X
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keeping Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Adaptive.
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction
display shows the lane markings as bright
lines in the assistance graphic.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 206).
For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 210).
Service menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv. menu:
Rcalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 243)
Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 358) or checking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 360)
Rcalling up the service due date (Y page 325).
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.
X
Z
On-board computer and displays
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
237
238
Menus and submenus
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the following options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 238)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 238)
RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 239)
RChanging the convenience settings
(Y page 239)
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 240)
The speed display is inverse to the speedometer.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature,
Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
[mph] appears.
X To change the setting: press a again.
Instrument cluster submenu
Light submenu
Selecting the distance unit
Setting the daytime running lamps
Settings menu
On-board computer and displays
Introduction
The Display Unit Speedometer / Odome‐
ter: function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in
the multifunction display.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
RDigital
speedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
RCurrent consumption and the range
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
RCruise control
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
This function is not available in Canada.
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime
Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the
W symbol in the multifunction display are
shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Further information on daytime running lamps
(Y page 110).
Switching the Intelligent Light System
on/off
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Intell. Light System function.
If the Intell. Light System function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the
L symbol in the multifunction display are
shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
When you activate Intell. Light System,
you activate the following functions:
Menus and submenus
mode
light function
RCornering light function
RExtended range fog lamps
ROff-road lights
Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 112).
RActive
Vehicle submenu
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock function.
When the Automatic Door Lock function is
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (Y page 84).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display
lights up orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Convenience submenu
Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/
Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,
the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 104).
Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment function.
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated,
the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the
multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Z
On-board computer and displays
RHighway
239
Menus and submenus
240
On-board computer and displays
For further information on belt adjustment, see
(Y page 48).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off
This function is only available when the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors fold
out automatically again as soon as you unlock
the vehicle.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the exterior mirror in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you select Yes, the multifunction display
shows a confirmation message.
X
If you want to reset the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Light submenu, you
must turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock.
ON&OFFROAD menu
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.
You can view the current off-road program settings in the ON&OFFROAD menu:
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 215)
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214)
X
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using
button :, they will not fold out automatically
(Y page 106).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :.
Restoring the factory settings
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X
:
;
=
?
A
B
X
Digital speedometer
Gear indicator
Upshift indicator
Engine oil temperature
Coolant temperature
Transmission oil temperature
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator Up =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine/transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
SETUP
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
: Engine mode (Comfort/Sport/Sport +)
; Suspension setting Comfort/Sport/
Sport +
= Transmission position D/M
? ESP® mode (ON/OFF)
SETUP displays the following information/functions:
Rthe digital speedometer
Rthe gear indicator
Rthe engine mode
Rthe suspension mode
Rthe transmission position
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP
is displayed.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
X Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
X
Starting a new lap
: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
: Lap
; RACETIMER
Z
241
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
242
X
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the % button on the steering wheel.
Confirm Yes with a.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and then press a to confirm
Start timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
Stop the RACETIMER.
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
X
X
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at least
one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.
Lap statistics
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation
; Total time driven
:
;
=
?
A
Lap
Lap time
Average lap speed
Lap length
Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap
evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.
Display messages
243
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 182)
RParking (Y page 156)
Hiding display messages
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
X
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
X
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Z
On-board computer and displays
Introduction
244
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X
!÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
245
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
246
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T!
÷
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
tion to Release the
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
was switched off.
X SmartKey : insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn to
position 1.
X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 157).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
only)
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 157).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
Switch the ignition off.
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
X
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
X
or
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually.
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
X
Do not drive on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:
Do not drive on.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 372).
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
X
Z
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
247
248
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
On-board computer and displays
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:
X
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake Inop‐
erative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:
X
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition,
the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the
Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
functional again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.
Inoperative
Z
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
249
On-board computer and displays
250
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive
Brake Assist may also have failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tive See Operator's
Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RFunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).
Active Brake Assist
Functions Limited
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
not available due to a malfunction.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Radar Sensors Dirty
See Operator's Man‐
ual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
Rdirt on sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RPRE-SAFE®
PLUS
Brake Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch off the engine.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
RActive
6
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).
6
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Front
Left Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
251
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
252
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Rear
Left Malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning
lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
6
The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc‐
G WARNING
tion Service
Required
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required or
Right Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
even though:
bag Disabled See
Operator's Manual
Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 52).
Z
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
253
254
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even
though:
bag Enabled See
Operator's Manual
Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 52).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The bulb in question is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 115).
Check Left Low Beam
(Example)
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active light function is faulty.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
b
The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Intell. Light Sys‐
tem Inoperative
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the fuses (Y page 348).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.
X
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The light sensor is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
Z
255
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
256
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to the à position.
Switch Off Lights
b
Switch On Headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
X
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the Adap‐
tive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages
+
Check Coolant Level
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
X
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 324).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X
?
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
The fan motor is malfunctioning.
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
X
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
G WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
#
See Operator's Man‐
ual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
257
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
258
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is
too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
Stop Vehicle See
Operator's Manual
Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).
X
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com.
X
4
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com.
X
4
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
There is a risk of engine damage.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).
8
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off
Fuel Level Low
Display messages
C
8
Gas Cap Loose
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
X
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
8
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
¸
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be
replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water
must be drained off.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ø
The DEF tank is almost empty.
X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist workshop (Y page 153).
Ultra Low-sulfur
Diesel Fuel Only
Replace Air Filter
Check Fuel Filter
Check Additive See
Operator's Manual
The DEF system is malfunctioning.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Ø
The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
further 16 times.
Remaining Starts: 16 X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist workshop (Y page 153).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it
will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank
with approximately 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF (Y page 153).
If the 'ten starts' message appears in the display and a warning tone
sounds, the DEF system is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
259
260
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
sounds.
X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Á
You cannot change the vehicle level.
Possible causes are:
RYou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level
RYou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is
being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 179)
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 185)
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 220).
Á
You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes.
X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.
Á
AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive More Slowly
Compressor Is Cool‐
ing
Malfunction
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Á
You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.
In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message, and a warning tone sounds.
Max. Speed 12 mph
G WARNING
The vehicle could tip and rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering movements.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached offroad level 2.
Á
The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3.
In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message.
The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).
g
The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.
In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message.
The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached offroad level 2.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
Malfunction
The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
Malfunction see
Operator's Manual
The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling characteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.
Raising Max. Speed
12 mph
Lowering Max.
Speed 12 mph
G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steering
movements.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
261
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
262
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ý
The differential lock is faulty.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ý
The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.
X Drive on carefully.
X Allow the differential lock to cool down.
The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.
LOW RANGE Stop
Apply Parking Brake
A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutral
position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive
wheels.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
LOW RANGE Malfunc‐
tion To Park, Apply
Brake
LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Different. Lock
Sys. Malfunction
Different. Locking
Sys. Cooling Down
Please Wait
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Max.
Speed 25 mph
X
LOW RANGE Max.
Speed 40 mph
X
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Shift to
Position N Briefly
You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmission
is not in position i.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to i.
LOW RANGE Shifting
Canceled Please
Reactivate
The gearshift process has been canceled.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
Ã
Inoperative
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist
Inoperative
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 182).
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual or Active
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative or
Active Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Off
Z
263
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
264
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist
Not Available When
Towing a Trailer
See Operator's Man‐
ual or Active Blind
Spot Assist Not
Available When Tow‐
ing a Trailer See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.
You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and
your vehicle.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative or
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Pilot Can‐
celed
The driver's door is open.
X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while
steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 190).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Parking Pilot Inop‐
erative
X
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.
Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 190).
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does
not appear in the multifunction display):
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Pilot Fin‐
ished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Distance Pilot Off
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated automatically (Y page 171).
Distance Pilot Now
Available
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
Distance Pilot Cur‐
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.
Z
265
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
266
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
erative
The following may have also failed:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Distance Pilot Pas‐
sive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot
- - - mph
A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 171).
Steering Pilot Cur‐
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Steering Pilot is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Clean the windshield.
Steering Pilot Inop‐ Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.
erative
However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.
erative
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cruise Control
--- mph
RA
condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 169).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 71).
Cruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (Y page 169).
Z
267
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
268
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check Tire Pressure
Soon
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 358).
Rthey
Check Tire Pressure
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
Please Correct Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 358).
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 361).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rthey
Warning Tire Mal‐
function
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra
flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).
Ryou
Tire Press. Monitor
Currently Unavaila‐
ble
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
Tire Press. Sen‐
sor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
269
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
270
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor
Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N'
to Start Engine
You attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position k
or h.
X Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Apply Brake to
Shift from 'P'
You attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and
Start Engine
You attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into
another transmission position with the engine switched off.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Apply Brake to
Select R
You have attempted to shift from position h to position k without
applying the brakes.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position k .
Transmission Not in
P Risk of Vehicle
Rolling Away
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
position k, i or h.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Close the driver's door completely.
The vehicle is moving.
Only Shift to 'P'
when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
tionary
and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Service Required Do
Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position h .
If position k, i or j is selected:
X
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possi‐ You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a malfuncble Service Required tion.
Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐
function Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to
position i.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Until then, always set the automatic transmission to position j
before switching off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
A
The tailgate is open
G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.
Z
271
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
272
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The hood is open.
G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all the doors.
Ð
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐
tor's Manual
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:
X
X
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you are unable to steer safely:
X
X
Do not drive on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 325).
Wiper Malfunction‐
ing
X
Hazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning
The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
273
SmartKey
Â
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Use the correct SmartKey.
X
Â
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Remove the SmartKey.
Â
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Change the battery (Y page 80).
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off.
A warning tone also sounds.
This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Obtain a New Key
Replace Key Battery
Key Not Detected
(white display message)
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X
Â
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Locate the SmartKey.
Z
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
274
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â
RThe SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But‐
ton and Insert Key
faulty.
SmartKey is continually undetected.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
RThe
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning tone ceases.
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Z
275
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
276
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J$
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
J$
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
Z
277
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
278
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
$J
֌
!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
279
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
280
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
å
N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applications.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
֌
N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
281
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
282
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F!
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
283
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 153).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is
canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
On-board computer and displays
Engine
On-board computer and displays
284
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 324).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 324).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
X
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function (Y page 72).
Z
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
285
286
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rthe
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
Rtraffic
lights
and yield signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
Ra diverted route
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Rstop
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
Z
287
Multimedia system
Function restrictions
Operating system
288
Operating system
Overview
General notes
Multimedia system
! Do not use the space in front of the display
for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
Rfor the currently selected media source
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
Rin hands-free mode during an active call
X
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following functions:
RRadio mode
RMedia mode with media search
RSound systems
RNavigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
RCommunication functions
RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
Rselect menu items on the display
Renter characters
Rselect a destination on the map
Rsave entries
The controller can be:
Rturned 3
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Rslid diagonally 2
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the main menu of the current operating
mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the current operating mode.
Operating system
You can assign predefined functions using the
g favorites button and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 289).
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
To call up: press the g button on the controller.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X To exit: press the g button again.
X
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
Press the g button.
COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller.
The menu bar is displayed.
X Select Reassign.
The categories are displayed.
X Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X Select a favorite.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn and press the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the
controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
X
X
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for
example.
X Select VehicleQVehicle Settings.
X Press and hold the g button until the
favorites are displayed.
X Add a favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Slide 6 the controller.
X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
Notes for route types:
X
REco
Route
Traffic Route
RDynamic
Z
Multimedia system
Favorites button
289
Operating system
Multimedia system
290
Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in
all countries).
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traffic
reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries).
RCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of Start, select the menu
item Continue.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
X Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
X.
X Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
X
Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
Rselect the last destination
Rselect a contact
Rselect a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or
telephone number.
Rselect destination on the map
Renter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destinations.
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address
Calculating the route
Multimedia system:
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate destinations list.
RUse
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Slide 6 the controller.
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code
Rcity or ZIP code, center
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection
X Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide 5 the controller.
X
Rsearch
Connecting a mobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
X
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you
connect:
RPhone book
RCall lists
RText messages and e-mail
i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X Select Tel/®QConn.
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Symbol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
system.
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
Z
291
Multimedia system
Operating system
Operating system
292
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):
Multimedia system
Bluetooth®
Select the
name of the mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey.
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phone depending on use of one-telephone
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or
above.
In two-telephone mode you can use all the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone. With the additional telephone, you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
X
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information is transmitted after you connect
the main telephone:
RPhone book
RCall lists
RText messages and e-mail
i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQCon‐
nect New Device.
X Select Connect via Vehicle.
X Select mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone
One-telephone mode: select Connect as
New Main Phone.
X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as
Additional Phone when a mobile phone is
already connected.
X
Operating system
Symbols in the device manager
The symbols are shown in color depending on
their use.
Symbol
Explanation
Mobile phone connected to the
multimedia system
Main telephone with full range of
functions
Additional telephone for incoming
calls in two telephone mode
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the
appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
RApple®
devices (e.g. iPhone®)
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
(Y page 294)
RCD
RDVD (COMAND)
RSD cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system:
Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
X
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face down.
Removing an SD card
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X Remove the SD card.
X
Z
Multimedia system
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
or
X Authorization by entering a passkey
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit
number sequence which you have chosen
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X
293
Operating system
294
Multimedia system
Connecting USB devices
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 293).
X
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear Seat
Entertainment System)
: Disc slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A Disc eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX display).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle
weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare
wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants
and luggage/cargo.
Do not exceed the load limit or permitted gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.
The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified
on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar
of the driver's door (Y page 361).
The load must also be distributed so that the
weight on each axle never exceeds the gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR
are on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar of the driver's door (Y page 361).
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(Y page 361).
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
to carry objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or front
seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the
load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
Z
295
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
Stowage areas
296
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Stowage and features
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295).
Glove box
Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in
the upper section of the glove box. It can be
removed to increase the stowage space in the
glove box.
X To remove: pull out partition :.
X To install: insert partition : and push it back
until it engages.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
X
i The glove box can be cooled (Y page 132).
Vehicles without touchpad
To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.
X
1 Glove box unlocked
2 Glove box locked
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
the mechanical key.
Stowage areas
Vehicles with touchpad and COMAND
To open: press button : at the front.
Armrest ; folds out.
X
297
Stowage compartment in the rear center console
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there is a
multimedia connector unit with two USB ports,
e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player in the
stowage compartment .
i There is a removable stowage tray in the
storage compartment, in which objects such
as an iPod® can be stored.
X
To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be open stowage spaces above and
below the stowage compartment.
Stowage net
To open: press marking :.
The eyeglasses compartment opens down.
X To close: press marking : again and the
eyeglasses compartment moves up and
engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Stowage compartment in the front center console
G WARNING
Vehicles with the Occupant Classification
System (OCS):
If the gross weight of the objects in the stowage net on the back of the front-passenger
seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot
correctly assess the occupant's weight category. The front-passenger front air bag could
deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in
the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always observe the permissible gross weight
of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy
objects in the cargo compartment.
Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger
footwell and on the back of the driver's and the
front-passenger seat.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 295).
To open: slide cover : forwards.
Stowage compartment ; appears.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
X
Z
Stowage and features
Eyeglasses compartment
Stowage areas
298
Through-loading facility in the rear
Stowage and features
There is a through-loading facility above the
armrest in the rear for transporting longer
objects. You can continue to use both of the
outer rear seats.
If objects or loads are not secured when being
transported in the through-loading facility, they
could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 295).
The through-loading facility is opened from the
cargo compartment.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 99).
X Slide release catch : to the left and swing
flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear
side of the rear bench seat.
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat
cushion are correctly engaged in position. To do
so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.
! Fold the seat cushion upwards before fold-
ing the rear bench seat forward. Otherwise,
the backrests may be damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the
front seats should not be moved to their rearmost position. Otherwise, the front seats and
the rear bench seat could be damaged.
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care
when folding it down. Make sure that the head
restraints are pushed all the way in so that the
backrests and seat cushions are not damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forward separately to increase the
cargo compartment capacity.
X
Push cover = forward until it is lying on the
rear seat armrest.
Folding the rear bench seat forward
Folding the rear bench seat back
If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a
larger person, it may not be possible to fold the
rear bench seat forward. In this case, move the
front seats as far forward as possible.
X Move the head restraints to the lowest position (Y page 100).
X Fold seat cushion : up.
X
Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.
Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing
so.
X Swing seat cushion : back.
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 100).
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
Pull release handle ; up in the direction of
the arrow until the backrest is fully released.
X Fold the backrest forward until it reaches the
cargo compartment position.
X
G WARNING
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
in direction or in the event of an accident. The
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk
of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load.
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RSecure
X
Guide seat belts ; under respective clips :.
the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Z
299
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
300
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Securing hooks
There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the
cargo compartment.
The parcel net must be pushed down before
using the cargo tie-down rings on the front righthand side of the cargo compartment.
There is a securing hook : on each side of the
cargo compartment.
Only secure lightweight luggage items on the
securing hooks (maximum 9 lbs (4 kg)).
Bag hook
G WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
a load.
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that
There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment
on the left-hand side.
X Press bag hook marking :.
X Turn bag hook : until it engages.
you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the cargo compartment cover.
A cargo compartment cover or a combined
cargo cover and net (cargo compartment cover
with cargo net) is installed, depending on equipment, behind the rear bench seat backrest.
Stowage areas
Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover
301
To install: place cargo compartment
cover : into anchorage ; on the right or
left-hand side.
X Push in opposite end cap = of cargo compartment cover : in the direction of the
arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
X
Cargo net in combined cargo cover
and net
Important safety notes
Removing/installing the cargo compartment cover (without integrated
cargo net)
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There is
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net.
It is important to use a cargo net if you load the
vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net
when transporting loads.
Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced. Visit a
qualified specialist workshop.
Attaching the cargo net
To remove: make sure that cargo compartment cover : is rolled up.
X Push end cap = of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right or left-hand side.
X Push cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
X Remove cargo compartment cover :.
X
X
Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook it into
eyelets ; using both hands.
Z
Stowage and features
To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover
back by grab handle : and clip it into retainers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from left-hand and right-hand retainers ;.
X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by
grab handle : until it is completely rolled up.
X
302
Stowage areas
Coat hooks on the tailgate
Stowage and features
: Coat hook
EASY-PACK load-securing kit
General notes
Installation
Open cargo compartment floor ;
(Y page 302).
X Attach brackets : in the desired position on
the side of cargo compartment floor ;.
X Close cargo compartment floor ;.
X
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to
use your cargo compartment for a variety of
purposes. The following accessory parts are
located under the cargo compartment floor:
Ra telescopic rod
Rtwo mounting elements
Rtwo brackets
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
Turn mounting elements = to =.
Insert mounting elements = into brackets :.
X Pull telescopic rod ? apart.
X Insert telescopic rod ? into mounting elements =.
X Turn both mounting elements = to & until
you feel them engage.
X
X
Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
Stowage areas
303
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
The accessory parts of the EASY–PACK loadsecuring kit, as well as TIREFIT and the tirechanging tools are located in the removable
insert in the stowage well.
Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's
upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo
compartment's upper seal ?.
X Fasten hook = to the retainer on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
X Press the cargo compartment floor down ;
until it engages.
X
i To remove the cargo compartment floor,
To open: holding the ribbing, press handle :
down ;.
Handle : folds up.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor up using
handle : until it rests against the cargo compartment cover.
X
X
Fold out hook = on the underside of the
cargo compartment floor in the direction of
the arrow.
undo the press studs below the cargo compartment floor. When you re-install the cargo
compartment floor, fasten it with the press
studs.
Locking/unlocking the cargo compartment floor
1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked
2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Z
Stowage and features
Opening/closing the cargo compartment floor
304
Features
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
Stowage and features
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
Rraise the sliding sunroof fully
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel fully
Ropen the tailgate fully
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 390).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
X
Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In
doing so, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295).
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 305).
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.
Features
Cup holder in the front center console
: Cup holder
; Cover
To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position.
X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will go.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on the cooling function: press
and hold button = until the blue indicator
lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch on the heating function: press
and hold button = until the red indicator
lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch off the function: press and hold
button = until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal
insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain
temperature is reached, residual heat indicator
lamp ; lights up. This means that the metal
insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason,
you must not reach into the cup holder metal
insert.
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the
cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.
X
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Temperature-controlled cup holder in
the front-compartment center console
X
: Cup holder
; Residual heat indicator lamp
= Switch
The temperature-controlled cup holder can be
used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks
warm.
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
Cup holder : is located in the rear seat armrest.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
Z
Stowage and features
The stowage compartments in the doors provide
space for bottles with a capacity of up to
34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).
The bottles are not secured or prevented from
tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open
drink containers in the stowage compartments.
305
Features
306
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Roller sunblinds on the rear side windows
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back suddenly as this would
damage the automatic roller mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
Stowage and features
blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia
reel. Therefore, either close the side window
or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
high speeds.
:
;
=
?
A
B
Mirror light
Additional sun visor
Retainer
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Vanity mirror
Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into retainer = and mirror cover B has
been folded up.
X
To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
back of the window.
Glare from the side
Fold down sun visor :.
Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X
X
Vehicles with additional sun visor:
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the windshield.
The roller sunblind can be hooked back into
place should it pop out from the top of the guide
rail.
X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.
X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide rail
=.
X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.
Features
Front ashtray
! The holder under the ashtray is not heat
resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the
ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could be
damaged.
Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System have an ashtray in the center console in the
rear compartment.
X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
The ashtray opens.
X To remove the insert: push into recess =
from the right.
Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the
right.
X Lift insert : up and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert : into
the holder and press down on the right until it
engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
To open: slide cover : to its foremost position.
X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.
X To remove the insert: push insert = to the
left ?.
Insert = slides out slightly to the right.
X Lift insert = up ; and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert = into
the holder and press it down on the right until
it engages.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
X
Rear-compartment ashtray
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and
before you fold the rear seats forward. You
can otherwise damage the ashtray.
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe
hot cigarette lighter falls
child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Ra
! The cigarette lighter in the center console in
the front compartment is not intended for
operating the tire inflation compressor.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Z
Stowage and features
Ashtray
307
Features
308
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost position.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
X
Socket in the cargo compartment
12 V sockets
General notes
Stowage and features
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
With the exception of the socket in the front
center console, all sockets can be used for
accessories with a maximum current draw of
240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center
console can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the
engine.
Socket in the front center console
! The socket is not suitable for operating the
tire inflation compressor.
To open: slide the cover to its foremost position.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
X To close: pull the cover back as far as it will
go.
X
Socket in the rear compartment center
console
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment System have two sockets in the center console in
the rear compartment.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
115 V socket
Important safety notes
G DANGER
When a suitable device is connected, the
115 V power socket will be carrying a high
voltage. You could receive an electric shock if
the connector cable or the 115 V power
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V
power socket that is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
G DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
you could receive an electric shock. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
power socket.
Features
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.
309
Using the 115 V power socket
General notes
To switch on: switch the ignition on.
Open flap =.
X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To switch off: disconnect the plug from
115 V power socket :.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
X
X
Problems with the 115 V power socket
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The warning lamp on the The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
115 V power socket is
X Start the engine.
not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 342).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.
X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal
power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable electronic device.
Z
Stowage and features
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices
can be connected. These devices, such as
games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has a
suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in.
Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
correctly into 115 V power socket.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 watts.
Rthe on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and
the cargo compartment are operational.
310
Features
mbrace
Stowage and features
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the USA.
A license agreement must be in place in order to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that
your system is activated and operational. To
register, press the ï Info call button. If any of
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available
Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
Customer Assistance Center
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Use the multimedia system volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RInfo call
You can find information and a description of all
available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected
if one of the following occurs:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
does not light up during the system self-diagnosis.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after
the system self-diagnosis:
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
- ï Info call button
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In the
event of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the following
telephone assistance services:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007.
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
Rthe
Features
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
311
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
second ;.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
X
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if
mbrace has successfully made the emergency
call. In this case, always summon assistance by
other means.
Breakdown assistance button
X
To call: press Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Z
Stowage and features
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 310).
The emergency call is triggered automatically if
an air bag is deployed or an Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an
automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
RIf the relevant mobile phone network is not
available, no emergency call can be initiated.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
continuously.
No voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display and must be confirmed.
312
Features
Stowage and features
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 315).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Service Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if:
Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside
Assistance call button is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
X
or
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Info call button
X
To call: press Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
Features
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can
still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call
will take priority and override all other active
calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
system to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to a
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
the address entered.
SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
The destination download function is available
if:
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.
X
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately.
You can use the Route Assistance function even
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive
a professional and reliable form of navigation
support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You
will then be guided live through the current route
section.
Search and Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a service for entering destinations in the navigation system. A destination
address which is found on Google Maps® can be
transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's
navigation system.
Z
Stowage and features
You can find further information on the mbrace
system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The system was unable to initiate an Info call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center has been established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
313
Features
314
Specifying and sending the destination
address
Go to the website http://maps.google.com
and enter a destination address into the entry
field.
X To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the website.
Example:
If you select "Send to vehicle" and then
"Mercedes-Benz", the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified when
setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.
X Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Stowage and features
X
Calling up a transmitted destination
address
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
The transmitted destination address is loaded
into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent.
If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles
with mbrace and active mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
X
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote unlocking if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can then be unlocked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately unlocked
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked
remotely.
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
After this time, remote closing may be delayed
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
can no longer be locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
the relevant mobile phone network is available
and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Remotely message appears in the multifunction
display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X Forward this number to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center along with your
PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contacts you and the local law enforcement
agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically
notifies the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use
the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example,
guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data need to be transferred during an
Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐
cle diagnostics? message appears in the
display.
X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
X If the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Start Ignition message appears: turn the
SmartKey to key position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 135).
X If the Please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehi‐
cle to a safe position. message
appears: please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehicle to a
safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐
nection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
shows a message to this effect together with
information about any special offers at your
workshop.
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 32).
Z
315
Stowage and features
Features
316
Features
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 29).
Stowage and features
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
save predefined routes in the navigation system.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points.
Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to
start route guidance? Destination
Received destination has been saved
in "Previous destinations". message on
the multimedia system display.
The route is saved.
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the display.
If you select No, the saved route can be called
up later in the navigation menu.
X Select Start.
Route guidance starts.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If the vehicle exceeds the set speed, a message
is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The
Customer Assistance Center then forwards this
information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in
which you receive this information beforehand.
Possible options include text message, e-mail or
an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle or
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.
These settings can be called up under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can also trigger an Info call
and notify the customer service representative
that you wish to activate geo-fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 30).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming the buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 317).
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive.
X To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 318).
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Z
317
Stowage and features
Features
318
Features
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Stowage and features
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 317).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Get out of the vehicle.
X Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
You now have 30 seconds to initiate the next
step.
X Get into the vehicle.
X Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then complete.
Notes on programming the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
recognized during programming. Comparable
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
Rif you live in Canada.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when following the programming steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two
seconds.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lights up
green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code.
X Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
When indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions:
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which
Features
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
Indicator lamp : initially lights up yellow and
then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide
the respective seat back.
X Rear seats: slide the corresponding front
seat forwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
Z
Stowage and features
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
RWhen programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
at varying distances.
RIf a further remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control
A. Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.
319
Features
320
To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X
Stowage and features
Infrared reflective windshield
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks
radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
To enable operation of radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas on the
windshield are permeable to radio waves :. In
these areas, you can install radio-controlled systems.
These areas can best be seen from outside the
vehicle by observing the light reflected off the
windshield.
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch
off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rremove
jewelry and watches
items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts
Rkeep
G WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
Electrically live components include ignition
coils, spark plug connectors and the test socket.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to
recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.
Z
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
321
Engine compartment
322
Engine oil
Important safety notes
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Maintenance and care
X
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;
up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
X
Radiator
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator. such as with a thermal mat or
insect protection cover. Otherwise, the values of
the European on-board diagnostics may be
affected. Some of these readings are required
by law and must be accurate at all times.
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to
recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
RUse of engine oil additives
Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick tube.
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.
X
X
Example: engine oil cap
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 323).
X
X
Z
Maintenance and care
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement.
323
324
Engine compartment
Further information on engine oil (Y page 387).
Checking coolant level
Additional service products
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Maintenance and care
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
open the cap to relieve pressure.
The coolant level may only be checked and coolant refilled when the engine and engine cooling
system have cooled down.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 137).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the
multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition
lock u (Y page 135).
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 137).
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137).
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 388).
X
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
Example: washer fluid reservoir
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to
add washer fluid (Y page 272).
Further information on windshield washer fluid
(Y page 389).
X
X
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:
X Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the % or a button on the steering
wheel.
Displaying service messages
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
i If the scheduled service intervals are excee-
ded, this may result in damage to the vehicle.
You can obtain up-to-date information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
level (Y page 322).
The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService
A in .. Days
A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
RService
Switch on the ignition.
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
X
X
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described in
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damage to the
major assemblies or the vehicle.
Z
325
Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS
326
Care
A qualified specialist workshop will reset the
ASSYST service interval display after the service
work has been carried out. You can also obtain
further information on maintenance work, for
example.
Maintenance and care
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under increased load on the vehicle,
maintenance work must be carried out more
frequently, for example:
RRegular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
RUse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
RIf the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! When cleaning your car, do not use:
Rdry,
coarse or hard cloths
cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
Rabrasive
you may scratch or damage the surfaces and
films.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! Before driving into an automatic car wash,
make sure that it is suitable for the dimensions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure
that:
Rthere is enough ground clearance between
the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of
the automatic car wash.
Rthe clearance width of the automatic car
wash is sufficient, particularly the width of
the guide rails.
Ryou enter the automatic car wash straight
and in the center of the guide rails in order
to avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.
Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle
is washed. The exterior mirrors could otherwise be damaged.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
Care
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that:
Rthe
side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
Rthat the blower of the ventilation/heating
system is switched off (OFF button has
been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
g.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
make sure that the automatic transmission is
in transmission position i; otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or
front-passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position j automatically and locks the wheels. You can
prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to i beforehand.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position j automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position i:
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition
lock 2 (Y page 135).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
X Release the brake pedal.
Release the electric parking brake.
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
X
X
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all countries
concerned.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlets.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Power washers
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
Z
Maintenance and care
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
327
328
Care
Maintenance and care
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Rbattery
Rplug-type couplings
Rlights
Rseals
Rtrim
Rventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can
lead to leaks or failures.
! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the high-pressure
cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C).
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic
plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
X
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
! The following can give the paint a glossy
appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:
RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! Only use automatic car washes which cor-
respond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs which finish
by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
a clear matt finish.
Care
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield (Y page 118).
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e. g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Z
Maintenance and care
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
329
Care
330
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the rear view camera and 360°
camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera or 360° camera
with a power washer.
Cleaning the side running board
Maintenance and care
! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the
side running board with alkaline or acidic
cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use
acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
The aluminum inserts could otherwise be
damaged.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
X To clean the camera: use clean water and a
soft cloth to clean the camera lens :.
X
360° camera: if you drive at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position u or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of
the 360° camera closes.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
! Vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
chromed screens should not be polished with
a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their
black shine. For optimal care, the screens
should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth
after every car wash. Commercially available
engine and care oils are suitable for this.
Care
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power
thinner or gasoline
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth.
! Please note the care instructions in the
Cleaning the plastic trim
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
H Environmental note
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
washer. Do not use solvents.
trailer coupling manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Ralcohol-based
Rabrasive
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Never attach the following to plastic surfaces:
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes
dirty or corroded.
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,
e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
brush.
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
i You can also have the maintenance work on
the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rperfume
oil container or similar
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Z
Maintenance and care
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
product tested and approved by MercedesBenz.
331
Care
332
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.
Maintenance and care
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to ensure
that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified
specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
Rdifferences in the texture
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean
artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Care
333
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Maintenance and care
X
Z
334
Where will I find...?
Where will I find...?
Information on reflective safety jackets
Reflective safety jacket
Breakdown assistance
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
The reflective safety jackets are located in front
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
stowage compartments.
X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag
containing the reflective safety jacket.
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the
reflective safety jacket.
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag.
X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage
compartment :.
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from
its packaging material before sliding it into
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or
make removing it difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
Maximum number of washes
Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not use a laundry dryer
Do not dry-clean
This is a class 2 vest
RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-
ments defined by the legal standard only:
- if the correct size is used and
- if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
fastened
RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
jackets are clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
from sources of heat and light.
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
not the only factor influencing the life span of
the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
Flat tire
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
Rjack
Rwheel chock
Rlug wrench
Rratchet wrench
Ralignment bolt
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
:
;
=
?
A
B
Folding wheel chock
Lug wrench
Alignment bolt
Towing eye
Jack
Ratchet wrench
Open the tailgate.
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 303).
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel (Y page 377).
X
X
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
Jack
Folding wheel chock
Towing eye
Alignment bolt
Tire inflation compressor
Lug wrench
Ratchet wrench
Tire sealant filler bottle
Open the tailgate.
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 303).
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 337).
X
X
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 335)
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
countries)
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 371).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 156).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle tool kit
335
Flat tire
336
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
make sure that the normal vehicle level is
selected (Y page 185).
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package: make sure that the normal vehicle
level is selected (Y page 179).
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition
lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 135).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 137).
X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
X Unload heavy luggage.
Breakdown assistance
X
i Only operate the tire inflation compressor
using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is
turned off (Y page 308).
An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the
engine.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 366).
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display:
Robserve the instructions
sages (Y page 268).
in the display mes-
Rcheck
the tire for damage
driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles
(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
RVehicle speed
RRoad condition
ROutside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Rif
i When replacing one or all tires, please
observe the following specifications for your
vehicle's tires:
Rsize
Rtype and
Rthe "MOExtended" mark
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
workshop.
Flat tire
G WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou
hear banging noises.
vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
Rthe
RESP®
is intervening constantly.
are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Rthere
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
RRinse
off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Rthe
Do not remove any foreign objects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
X
Z
Breakdown assistance
Important safety notes
337
Flat tire
338
Breakdown assistance
compressor from the stowage well underneath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 335).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A
out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
X Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehicle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 307)
12 V sockets: (Y page 308)
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 307). Observe the notes on sockets
(Y page 308).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure may briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 339).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 338).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
use clean water.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
cleaner as soon as possible.
X
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Flat tire
Tire pressure reached
G WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire
sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i In cases such as the one mentioned above,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
tire inflation compressor.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
H Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes:
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
X
X
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button E on the filler hose.
X The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge
F.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
Breakdown assistance
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
339
340
Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle)
12 V battery - important safety notes
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
operating instructions. You could otherwise fail
to recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Breakdown assistance
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen
braking
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rin
For further information about ABS and ESP®,
see (Y page 66) and (Y page 70).
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
Battery (vehicle)
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special
collection point for used batteries.
341
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and faceguard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
qualified specialist workshop.
For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always have work on batteries carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12volt battery yourself, please observe the following:
RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
RSwitch off the ignition.
RDisconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal.
The transmission is locked in position j
after disconnecting the battery.
After the work has been done, install the battery and replace the cover of the positive terminal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. However, you can
also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Manual
Z
Breakdown assistance
! Have the battery regularly checked at a
342
Jump-starting
On vehicles with a multimedia system and
navigation system, the clock is set automatically.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 106)
Charging the 12 V battery
Breakdown assistance
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 342).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 342).
Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by MercedesBenz is available as an accessory. It permits the
charging of the battery in its installed position.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information and availability. Read the
battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged
battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
Jump-starting
343
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the
catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Z
Breakdown assistance
G WARNING
344
Jump-starting
Make sure that:
jumper cables are not damaged.
RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 135).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
RThe
i Right-hand-drive vehicle: the jump-starting connection points may be located on the other
Breakdown assistance
side of the vehicle.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, beginning with donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
Towing and tow-starting
345
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to
recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
G WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe
engine is not running.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
G WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Rthe
towing eye could detach itself
vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Rthe
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 382).
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if available. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
! Observe the following points when towing
with a tow rope:
the tow rope on the same side on
both vehicles.
RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer
than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in
the middle, e.g. with a white cloth
(11.8 x 11.8 in). This will make other road
users aware that a vehicle is being towed.
ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch.
RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does
not sag.
RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
the vehicle.
RSecure
! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery
or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight as
possible and not at an acute angle. Excessive
tractive power could damage the vehicles.
When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid towing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towing
bar helps to keep the tractive power low.
! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position j when you open the
Z
Breakdown assistance
Towing and tow-starting
346
Towing and tow-starting
driver's or front-passenger door, which could
damage the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure
the differential locks are in automatic mode.
When towing, the differential locks must not
be switched on. The transmission may otherwise be damaged.
Breakdown assistance
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
i when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot release the electric parking brake
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position i
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 239). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can be
towed out of that area with both axles on the
ground. In this case, the towing distance must
not be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must not
exceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). For
longer distances, have the vehicle loaded and
transported.
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front and
rear behind covers :;.
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (Y page 335).
X To open the cover at the front: press the
mark on cover : inwards in the direction of
the arrow.
X To open the cover at the rear: insert a flat,
blunt object into the cutout and lever
cover ; out of the bumper.
X Take cover : or ; off the opening.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Position cover : or ; in the bumper and
press the cover on until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
X
X
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
The automatic transmission shifts to position
j automatically when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Towing and tow-starting
All vehicles
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
X
Securing the vehicle
Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and
4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the
transport platform.
X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehicle.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive
Damping System PLUS)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged.
The weaker damping forces of the vehicle to
be transported can cause the vehicle/trailer
combination to swing.
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/
trailer combination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Z
Breakdown assistance
In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position i when towing away the
vehicle, you must observe the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 112).
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
the combination switch, the hazard warning
lamp starts flashing again.
347
348
Fuses
When transporting, make sure that:
Fuses
Rthe
Important safety notes
vehicle is has been loaded onto the
transporter correctly
Rthe vehicle is secured at all four wheels with
suitable tensioning straps
Ryou do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h)
Securing the vehicle
! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
Breakdown assistance
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and
4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the
transport platform.
X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehicle.
Information on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift
the automatic transmission to position N, you
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical
system in the same way as when jump-starting
(Y page 342).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 342).
G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart-
ment and under the rear bench seat, only use
fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse
box under the rear bench seat (Y page 350).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Before changing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 348)
X Switch off the engine.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Fuses
Dashboard fuse box
! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-
driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You
could damage the dashboard or the cover.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this
work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Open the hood (Y page 321).
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
X
X
To close: check whether the seal is seated
correctly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into
the retainers.
X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X Close the hood.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
dashboard.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
X
X
Z
Breakdown assistance
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same as the SmartKey
having been removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 156).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box on the front-passenger side of the
dashboard
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
RFuse box under the rear bench seat
349
Fuses
350
Fuse box under the rear bench seat
Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward
(Y page 298).
X To open: lift and fold out carpet : in the
direction of the arrow.
Breakdown assistance
X
Release clamps ; by pressing them in the
direction of the arrow.
X Fold cover = up in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
i The fuse allocation chart is located under
cover =.
X To close: insert cover = into the retainers on
the side of the fuse box.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; engage
audibly.
X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back
(Y page 298).
X
Operation
G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel
G WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo
not drive with a flat tire.
replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rimmediately
attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 376).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure information can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,
speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so
slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the
tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.
Rpay
Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure.
Z
Wheels and tires
Important safety notes
351
Wheels and tires
352
Operation
Pay particular attention to damage such as:
RCuts in the tires
RPunctures in the tires
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
all tires (Y page 352). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 354).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 376).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
RTire pressure
RDistance covered
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
Notes on tire tread
G WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer
RM+S
tires: â in (3 mm)
tires: ã in (4 mm)
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mount a different type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 336).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth. This significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 376).
Winter operation
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor
and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 336).
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 371).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elasticity of summer tires and therefore also the
traction and braking capability are reduced considerably. Change the tires on your vehicle to
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby
damaging the tires permanently. MercedesBenz cannot accept responsibility for this type
of damage.
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
Once the winter tires are mounted:
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 357).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 358).
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 358).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 376).
Snow chains
G WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
Z
Wheels and tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
353
354
Tire pressure
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever
install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
! Check the snow chains for damage before
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow
chains may snap and damage the following
components:
Rwheel
Rwheel housing
Rwheel suspension
For this reason, you must use only snow
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions.
! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height
1) if snow chains have been installed. The
vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
Wheels and tires
! Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive Damping
System): do not use the sport mode when
driving with snow chains mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Install the snow chains on all driven wheels for
maximum tractive power and driving stability. If
you own snow chains for two driven wheels only,
install the snow chains to the wheels on the rear
axle. The vehicle then remains more stable
under braking.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel/tire combinations (Y page 376).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
RDo
not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
installed (Y page 190).
You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 71)
when pulling away with snow chains mounted.
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 376).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Rthe
tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
Rmonthly,
at least
the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rif
Details on tire pressure can be found at the following positions in the vehicle:
RTire and Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver's side
Rtable for tire pressure on the inside of the fuel
filler flap
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of:
Tire pressure
Rincorrectly
set tire pressure
loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a foreign object that has penetrated the tire
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
Rsudden
355
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
illustration (example).
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with the emergency
spare wheel can be found under "Emergency
spare wheel" (Y page 377).
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value
for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure
value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for
that tire size; see illustration (example).
: Recommended tire pressures
Wheels and tires
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 361).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Z
356
Tire pressure
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can
be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 366).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
table, may have a negative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
can be checked in the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 152)
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on
vehicle equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Tire pressure
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
357
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Underinflated tires may:
leading to tire defects
affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Radversely
Overinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rincrease
the braking distance
affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Radversely
Maximum tire pressures
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 354).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the
valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 354).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 354).
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
Z
Wheels and tires
Roverheat,
358
Tire pressure
a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message which appears in
the Service menu of the multifunction display.
Information on the message display can be
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system" section (Y page 358).
Wheels and tires
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 354).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of
acceleration).
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
pressure loss warning system can only give
reliable warnings if you have set the correct
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 354).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Service menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.
X
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
or
Press the % button.
When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
select Cancel.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
X
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
functions if the corresponding sensors are
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. After a few minutes of
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction
display, see illustration (example).
For information on the message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section (Y page 360).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the mounting of incompatible
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 354). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
the cold tires (Y page 361). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a
result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 354).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
Z
359
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
360
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for approximately
a minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 268).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to those measured at sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gage are higher than those shown by
the on-board computer. In this case, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way
radios) that may be being operated in or near the
vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electronically
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
(Y page 135) in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press a.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few minutes
message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure value to the individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
display message is shown instead of the tire
pressure display. The tire pressures are already
being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for a few
minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is
mounted is not the same as the current tire
pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
X
Tire pressure monitor warning messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
RIf
the Please Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
The tire pressure must be corrected when the
opportunity arises.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
least one tire has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in at least one tire has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 268).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.
Loading the vehicle
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also set reference
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 354).
You can find more tire pressure values for
various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap
(Y page 355).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press a.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressure will be displayed
after driving a few minutes message.
X Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐
erence Values message appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor
Country
Radio type approval number
USA
FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada
IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC: 2546A-GG4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
Z
Wheels and tires
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
361
Loading the vehicle
362
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
X
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration.
You can find the valid maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Loading the vehicle
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
363
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 361).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 220).
Step 1
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
5
3
1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occupants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg)
540 lbs (245 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Z
Wheels and tires
Step 2
364
All about wheels and tires
Step 3
Wheels and tires
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle
750 lbs (340 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg)
Tire and Loading Information placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
All about wheels and tires
Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 361).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the
trailer load/noseweight is included in the load
along with occupants and luggage. The trailer
load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of
the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All about wheels and tires
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 353).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 352). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that
Z
Wheels and tires
All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
365
366
All about wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 369)
Wheels and tires
; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
cation Number (Y page 368)
Maximum load rating (Y page 368)
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 357)
Manufacturer
Tire material (Y page 369)
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 366)
D Load index (Y page 368)
E Tire name
=
?
A
B
C
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
:
;
=
?
A
B
Tire width
Nominal aspect ratio in %
Tire code
Rim diameter
Load bearing index
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or may contain one letter
that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
All about wheels and tires
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
3
ROptionally,
tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index
Q
Wheels and tires
description, depending on the manufacturer
(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 361).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 368).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 368).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
367
Speed rating
M+S3
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
T M+S3
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
H M+S3
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
V M+S3
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
368
All about wheels and tires
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLE 63):
130 mph (210 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles: 155 mph
(250 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLE 63 with increased top
speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 376).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
Load index
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 361).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Wheels and tires
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed index B on the sidewall of the
tire (Y page 366).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
All about wheels and tires
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
Z
Wheels and tires
requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 376).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides information about the age of a tire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32
in 2014.
369
370
All about wheels and tires
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the
weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on
the trailer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Wheels and tires
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
tem and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Aspect ratio
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Tire pressure
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
Rif
the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Changing a wheel
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible
weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow
hitch can support.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 335) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 336).
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in
the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency
spare wheel according to the description under
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 372).
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
Z
Wheels and tires
Sidewall
371
Changing a wheel
372
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system or
the tire pressure monitor (Y page 358).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Wheels and tires
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition
lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 135).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 137).
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
X
i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tirechange tool kit. For more information on
which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench
Preparing the vehicle
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:
when mounting the emergency spare wheel in
the event of a flat tire, follow the additional
notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire"
(Y page 335).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j.
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
make sure that the normal vehicle level is
selected (Y page 185).
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package: make sure that the normal vehicle
level is selected (Y page 179).
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 335).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.
X
Changing a wheel
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RDo not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
! Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
X
Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows).
X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
Z
Wheels and tires
X
373
Changing a wheel
374
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
The alignment bolt on the jack must be inserted into the intended opening on the jacking
point.
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
X
Wheels and tires
Mounting a new wheel
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
X
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as
long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying
any external force on the brake disks. This could
impair the level of comfort when braking.
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 371).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
Changing a wheel
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel could damage the
brake system.
375
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-
factory and for the collapsible spare wheel
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 4MATIC)
; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft
(150 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change
tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor again.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 354).
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare
wheel (Y page 379).
Only then lower the vehicle.
X
Z
Wheels and tires
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the
ble spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle,
inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the
tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
376
Emergency spare wheel
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
Information regarding permitted wheel/tire
combinations can be found at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wheels and tires
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 354).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
the vehicle:
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
Rwith the same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
workshop.
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt
your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
Emergency spare wheel
wheel of a different size briefly.
not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
Rdo
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only
use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the
brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact
wheel from the rear axle must first be
replaced with the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front
axle can then be replaced by the undamaged
wheel from the rear axle.
Make sure to note the placard on the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare
wheel of a different size, you must not exceed
the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 354). The value on the wheel is
valid.
Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel
is not the same as the current tire pressure of
the emergency spare wheel.
Removing/stowing the emergency
spare wheel
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be
found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.
General notes
Information regarding permitted emergency
spare wheels can be found at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mounting the emergency spare wheel is described under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 372).
An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the speed
limitation specified on the emergency spare
wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 303).
X Vehicle without a lockable cargo compartment floor: turn emergency spare wheel
retainer ; counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel :.
Z
Wheels and tires
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
377
Emergency spare wheel
378
Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
X
Vehicle with a lockable cargo compartment floor: remove the contents of stowage
tray =.
X Turn the central retaining screw in stowage
tray = and in "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Remove stowage well =.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel :.
X
Wheels and tires
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel in the emergency spare
wheel bag
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
X Detach the fastening straps ;.
X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = of
fastening straps ; from the cargo tie-down
rings.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
into the emergency spare wheel bag and
close the emergency spare wheel bag.
X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into
the cargo compartment with the carrying
strap at the back.
X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of
fastening straps ; into the cargo tie-down
rings.
X Tighten fastening straps ;.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the
vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture
may get into the vehicle.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the
stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 303).
X Unscrew retaining screw ; counter-clockwise.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel : from the
spare wheel well.
Emergency spare wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel in the emergency
spare wheel bag
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the collapsible spare wheel is
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
X Unhook retaining spring hooks : of fastening strap ; from the cargo tie-down rings.
X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
X Open the bag and remove the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 379).
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
X Place the collapsible spare wheel into the
emergency spare wheel bag and close the
emergency spare wheel bag.
X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
the collapsible spare wheel into the cargo
compartment with the carrying strap at the
back.
X Hook retaining spring hooks : of fastening
strap ; into the cargo tie-down rings.
X Tighten fastening strap ;.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 4MATIC)
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the
tire inflation compressor before lowering the
vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be
damaged.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the tire inflation compressor label and
on the tire sealant bottle.
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (Y page 372).
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted
before it is inflated.
X Remove the tire inflation compressor from
the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor (Y page 335).
Z
Wheels and tires
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 379).
Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have this work performed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the
valve and release the air.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
minutes.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X Screw the valve cap back on.
X Lay collapsible spare wheel : in the emergency spare wheel well.
X Screw in retaining screw ; clockwise in the
collapsible spare wheel to the stop.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor down
(Y page 303).
379
Emergency spare wheel
380
Stow connector ? and hose B in the lower
section of the tire inflation compressor.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.
X
Pull connector ? and hose B out of the
housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut ; of hose B onto the valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehicle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 307)
12 V sockets: (Y page 308)
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 307). Observe the notes on sockets
(Y page 308).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press on and off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on and off switch A on the
tire inflation compressor to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified
pressure, press pressure release valve button : until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X Unscrew union nut ; on hose B from the
valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again.
Wheels and tires
X
Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not recognize dangers.
i The data stated here specifically refers to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Installing two-way radios and mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
381
In particular, the following conditions must be
complied with:
Ronly approved wavebands may be used
Robserve the maximum permissible output
in these wavebands
Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
account current scientific discussions relating
to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
The following antenna positions may be used for
the correct installation of two-way radios:
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for
example if:
Rthe
two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna
Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always connect two-way radios to the lowreflection exterior antenna when operating in
the vehicle.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if
Approved antenna positions
: Rear roof area
; Rear fender
i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
equipment") when installing wireless devices.
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
Z
Technical data
G WARNING
382
Identification plates
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:
Technical data
Frequency band
Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
RTwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
RTwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the
following wavebands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
; Paint code
= VIN
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
; Paint code
= VIN
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
Service products and filling capacities
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
383
Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H Environmental note
Engine number
: Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
RFuels
RExhaust
gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
DEF
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match.
You should therefore only use products that
have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz.
You can identify service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
R0 W-30
R5 W-30
R5 W-40
Z
Technical data
Open the front right-hand door.
X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
You will see the VIN.
The VIN can also be found in the following locations:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 383)
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 382)
X
384
Service products and filling capacities
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Of which
reserve
Mercedes-AMG GLE 43
4MATIC
Approx.
3.2 US gal
(12.0 l)
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Approx.
3.7 US gal
(14.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
3.2 US gal
(12.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
Technical data
Model
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
! Do not use the following:
RGasoline
Tank capacity
with more than 10% ethanol
(100% ethanol)
RGasoline with methanol
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle.
RE100
Model
Total capacity
GLE 550 e 4MATIC
21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
All other models
24.6 US gal
(93.0 l)
! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
Service products and filling capacities
i For more information, please contact a
qualified specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.
Information on refueling (Y page 151).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not
include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additives recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
for use on the product label. More information
about recommended additives can be
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Diesel
Fuel grade
G WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
! Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD),
otherwise it may lead to increased wear and
damage to the fuel system, engine and
exhaust system.
! Do not use the following:
Rgasoline
Rdiesel
with a bio-diesel content greater
than 5% (e.g. B20)
Rbio-diesel
Rvegetable oil
Rparaffin
Rkerosene
Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
not use any special additives. Otherwise,
engine damage may occur.
! In countries outside USA and Canada, only
use sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur content
under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
Information on refueling (Y page 151).
Low outside temperatures
i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper-
ties is available during the winter months.
Further information about fuel properties can
be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas
stations.
Z
Technical data
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.
385
386
Service products and filling capacities
Flexible Fuel vehicles
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
Technical data
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the
following fuel types:
Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline
RE85 fuel
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
unleaded gasoline
i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by
the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
Fuel consumption
The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that
of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline.
The amount of fuel consumed when operating
the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than
with premium-grade gasoline.
Maintenance
Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
that you are operating or have operated the
vehicle with E85 fuel.
Low outside temperatures
If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †),
the starting procedure can take noticeably longer when operating with E85 fuel.
E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).
DEF
Important safety notes
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling DEF (Y page 383).
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
Rnot poisonous
Rcolorless and odorless
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures
DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from the
factory equipped with a DEF preheating system.
Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even
at temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †).
Service products and filling capacities
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do
not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy
the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service
products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:
Rincreased emission values
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
Rengine damage
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during
repair work, it must not be returned to the tank.
The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed.
All models
Gasoline engines
All models
Filling capacities
Model
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to set replacement intervals longer than
those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions on the service interval
display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notes on service products (Y page 383).
The engine oils are matched to the performance
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Total capacity
8.5 US gal
(32.0 l)
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Diesel engines
All models
Engine oil
General notes
MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
229.5, 229.6
229.5
MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
229.52
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40
or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an engine oil
change, including the oil filter.
Model
! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating from those expressly
required for the prescribed service intervals.
Capacity
GLE 300 d 4MATIC
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
GLE 350 d 4MATIC
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Mercedes-AMG
GLE 43 4MATIC
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
Z
Technical data
Additives
387
388
Service products and filling capacities
Model
Capacity
GLE 550 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG
GLE 63 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG
GLE 63 S 4MATIC
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
All other models
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
Technical data
G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 383).
Only use brake fluid approved for MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop in accordance
with the replacement intervals and the
replacement confirmed in the service report.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the service report.
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 383).
The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
the following:
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
Service products and filling capacities
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Approx. 11.9 US qt
(11.3 l)
GLE 300 d 4MATIC
Approx. 10.7 US qt
(10.1 l)
GLE 350
Approx. 11.1 US qt
(10.5 l)
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products
(Y page 383).
At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.
GLE 350 4MATIC
Approx. 11.1 US qt
(10.5 l)
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
GLE 350 d 4MATIC
Approx. 12.2 US qt
(11.5 l)
GLE 400 4MATIC
Approx. 10.3 US qt
(9.7 l)
Mercedes-AMG
GLE 43 4MATIC
Approx. 10.3 US qt
(9.7 l)
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked at specified intervals
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model
Capacity
GLE 550 4MATIC
All other models
Approx. 10.3 US qt
(9.7 l)
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
Z
Technical data
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
389
390
Vehicle data
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Observe the information relating to level control:
RAIRMATIC package (Y page 185)
ROffroad Engineering package (Y page 215)
Dimensions and weights
Technical data
Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
RPossible
dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Refrigerant
Capacity
All models
37.0 ± 0.4 oz
(1050 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
All models
Capacity
3.9 ± 0.4 oz
(110 ± 10 g)
Model
Mercedes‑AM
G vehicles
:
Opening
height
;
Max.
headroom
85 in
2157 mm 2159 mm
76.8 in
1949 mm 1950 mm
Vehicle data
:
Opening
height
;
Max.
headroom
Steel suspension
86.4 in
(2195 mm)
78.2 in
(1987 mm)
AIRMATIC
package
84.3 in 87.2 in
(2140 mm 2215 mm)
76.0 in 79.0 in
(1931 mm 2006 mm)
ON&OFFROAD
package
84.3 in 88.4 in
(2140 mm 2245 mm)
76.0 in 80.2 in
(1931 mm 2036 mm)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Mercedes-AMG GLE 43
4MATIC
Vehicle length
189.6 in
(4816 mm)
Vehicle width including
exterior mirrors
84.3 in
(2141 mm)
Vehicle width without exterior mirrors, without side
running board
76.2 in
1935 mm
Vehicle width without exterior mirrors, with side running board
Maximum vehicle height
(steel suspension)
69.4 in
(1762 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(AIRMATIC package)
71.6 in
(1818 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(ON&OFFROAD package)
72.8 in
(1848 mm)
Vehicle length
191.0 in
(4852 mm)
Vehicle width including
exterior mirrors
84.3 in
(2141 mm)
Minimum vehicle height
(AIRMATIC package,
ON&OFFROAD package)
69.2 in
(1758 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
69.4 in
(1762 mm)
Wheelbase
114.8 in
(2915 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S
4MATIC)
69.3 in
(1760 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (steel suspension)
8.0 in
(202 mm)
Wheelbase
114.8 in
(2915 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package)
10.0 in
(255 mm)
Maximum ground clearance
7.1 in
(180 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (ON&OFFROAD package)
11.2 in
(285 mm)
Turning circle
38.7 ft
(11.80 m)
7.1 in
(180 mm)
Maximum roof load
220 lb
(100 kg)
Minimum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package,
ON&OFFROAD package)
Maximum roof load
220 lbs
(100 kg)
Z
Technical data
All other models with:
391
392
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Technical data
All other models
Vehicle width including
exterior mirrors
84.3 in
(2141 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(steel suspension)
70.7 in
(1796 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(AIRMATIC package)
71.6 in
(1818 mm)
Maximum vehicle height
(ON&OFFROAD package)
72.8 in
(1848 mm)
Minimum vehicle height
69.2 in
(1758 mm)
Wheelbase
114.8 in
(2915 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (steel suspension)
8.0 in
(202 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package)
10.0 in
(255 mm)
Maximum ground clearance (ON&OFFROAD package)
11.2 in
(285 mm)
Minimum ground clearance
7.1 in
(180 mm)
Turning circle
38.7 ft
(11.80 m)
Maximum roof load
Model
220 lb
(100 kg)
Vehicle
length
Fording depth
! The depth of water must not exceed the
value specified in the table. Note that the
possible fording depth is less in flowing water.
: Fording depth
On vehicles with the AIRMATIC package or the
Off-Road Engineering package, loads up to the
maximum permissible load have no influence on
fording capability.
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
Fording
depth
Steel-sprung vehicles
19.7 in
(50 cm)
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC
package
Raised level
19.7 in
(50 cm)
Vehicles with the Off-Road
Engineering package
GLE 400 4MATIC
GLE 550 4MATIC
189.5 in
(4813 mm)
Off-road level 1
19.7 in
(50 cm)
All other models
189.7 in
(4819 mm)
Off-road level 2
19.7 in
(50 cm)
Off-road level 3
23.6 in
(60 cm)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Raised level
19.7 in
(50 cm)
Vehicle data for off-road driving
For more information about off-road fording, see
(Y page 164).
Vehicles with AMG bodystyling
:
;
23°
26°
Normal level
22°
24°
Raised level
26°
28°
Normal level
22°
24°
Off-road level 1
24°
26°
Off-road level 2
26°
28°
Off-road level 3
28°
29°
Steel-sprung vehicles
Approach/departure angle
393
Vehicles with the
AIRMATIC package
Vehicles with the
Off-Road Engineering package
:
;
26°
26°
Normal level
23°
24°
Raised level
29°
28°
Normal level
23°
24°
Off-road level 1
26°
26°
Off-road level 2
29°
28°
Off-road level 3
30°
29°
Normal level (in sport
mode with AMG
adaptive sport suspension system activated)
21°
24°
Raised level
23°
24°
Steel-sprung vehicles
Vehicles with the
AIRMATIC package
Vehicles with the
Off-Road Engineering package
Mercedes-AMG
vehicles
For further information about approach/departure angles, see (Y page 168).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions and the
road surface conditions.
Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 100 % when the LOW RANGE off-road gear
is selected.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 80 %.
Vehicles without the Off-Road Engineering
package: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 80 %.
GLE 550 e 4MATIC: the maximum gradient
climbing ability is 50 %.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain.
i If the load on the front axle is reduced when
pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front
wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.
The rear wheel torque is increased, making it
easier to drive off.
Z
Technical data
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG bodystyling)
394
Trailer tow hitch
For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 168).
MercedesAMG GLE 43 4MATI
C
GLE 550 e 4MATIC
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the cooling system and drive train
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle
type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chassis
frame.
4410 lbs (2000 kg)
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the
drawbar noseweight is not included in
the trailer load)
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
All models
575 lbs (261 kg)
GLE 300 d 4MATIC
530 lbs (240 kg)
GLE 350
530 lbs (240 kg)
MercedesAMG GLE 43 4MATI
C
Technical data
GLE 550 e 4MATIC
355 lbs (160 kg)
The actual noseweight may not be higher than
the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification
plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the
trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for
Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
: Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
; Rear axle center line
Gross rear axle weight rating when towing a trailer
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
Trailer loads
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a
minimum gradient-climbing capability
of 12% from a standstill)
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
All models
7200 lbs (3265 kg)
GLE 300 d 4MATIC
6615 lbs (3000 kg)
GLE 350
6615 lbs (3000 kg)
All models
3527 lbs (1600 kg)
GLE 300 d 4MATIC
3638 lbs (1650 kg)
GLE 350 d 4MATIC
3638 lbs (1650 kg)
MercedesAMG GLE 43 4MATI
C
Trailer tow hitch
GLE 550 e 4MATIC
3704 lbs (1680 kg)
MercedesAMG GLE 63 4MATI
C
MercedesAMG GLE 63 S 4MA
TIC
3858 lbs (1750 kg)
395
Ball position of the ball coupling
: 7.5"
; 2"
= 2.75"
Technical data
When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions
stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.
Z
396
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08 Modify Date : 2017:08:31 10:32:20-04:00 Create Date : 2017:08:31 10:30:32-04:00 Metadata Date : 2017:08:31 10:32:20-04:00 Creator Tool : AH XSL Formatter V6.1 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.1.6.12100 (2013/07/19 17:47JST) Format : application/pdf Creator : Owner: y.io.creator Document ID : uuid:c71db975-0a00-4e19-b0bd-e57d0dc1efd5 Instance ID : uuid:046abb96-aea8-4689-be9a-d32e659b527d Producer : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S) Page Count : 398 Author : Owner: y.io.creator Keywords : Stylesheet-Version, 3.10.13, (SAXON, 8.9, from, Saxonica) One Vision Creator : Speedflow Check Version 11.5 (SR 4) One Vision Dongle ID : _9DmSJQI6Za8Q6 One Vision Producer : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S) Title : Trapped : FalseEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools